You are on page 1of 296

Service

Workshop Manual
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ ,
Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ➤ ,
Sparchassis 2010 ➤ ,
Transporter 2004 ➤ ,
Transporter 2010 ➤ , Zugkopf 2010 ➤
Communication
Edition 02.2019

Service Department. Technical Information


Service
List of Workshop Manual Repair Groups

Repair Group
91 - Communication

Technical information should always be available to the foremen and mechanics, because their
careful and constant adherence to the instructions is essential to ensure vehicle road-worthiness and
safety. In addition, the normal basic safety precautions for working on motor vehicles must, as a
matter of course, be observed.

All rights reserved.


No reproduction without prior agreement from publisher.

Copyright © 2019 Volkswagen AG, Wolfsburg K0058980220


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Contents

91 - Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1 Communication systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 General description - communication systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Fault finding - communication systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.3 Notes on performing repair work on communication systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.4 Assembly overview - battery, transmitter and receiver unit, fuse and wiring harness . . . . 3
1.5 Implementation of suppression measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.6 General notes on operating mobile telephones and two-way radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2 “Alpha” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.1 General description - “Alpha” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.2 Fitting location overview - “ALPHA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.3 Removing and installing “ALPHA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.4 Connector pin assignment - “ALPHA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.5 Anti-theft coding - “ALPHA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3 “Beta” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.1 General description - “BETA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.2 Fitting location overview - “BETA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.3 Removing and installing “BETA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.4 Connector pin assignment - “BETA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.5 Anti-theft coding - “BETA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.6 Adapting components - “BETA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4 “Gamma” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.1 General description - “GAMMA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.2 Fitting location overview - “GAMMA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.3 Removing and installing “GAMMA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.4 Connector pin assignment - “GAMMA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.5 Anti-theft coding - “GAMMA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.6 Adapting components - “GAMMA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
5 “DELTA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.1 General description - “DELTA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.2 Fitting location overview - “DELTA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.3 Removing and installing “DELTA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5.4 Connector pin assignment - “DELTA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
5.5 Anti-theft coding - “DELTA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.6 Adapting components - “DELTA” radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
6 Radio system “R 110” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.1 General description - radio system “R 110” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.2 Fitting location overview - radio system “R 110” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.3 Removing and installing radio system “R 110” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
6.4 Connector pin assignment - radio system “R 110” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6.5 Anti-theft coding - radio system “R 110” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
6.6 Adapting components - radio system “R 110” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7 Radio system “RCD 200” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
7.1 General description - radio system “RCD 200” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
7.2 Overview of fitting locations - radio system “RCD 200” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
7.3 Removing and installing radio system “RCD 200” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
7.4 Connector pin assignment - radio system “RCD 200” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
7.5 Anti-theft coding - radio system “RCD 200” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
7.6 Adapting components - radio system “RCD 200” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
8 Radio system “RCD 210” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
8.1 General description - radio system “RCD 210” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
8.2 Overview of fitting locations - radio system “RCD 210” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Contents i
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

8.3 Removing and installing radio system “RCD 210” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57


8.4 Connector pin assignment - radio system “RCD 210” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
8.5 Anti-theft coding - radio system “RCD 210” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
8.6 Adapting components - radio system “RCD 210” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
9 Radio system “RCD 310” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
9.1 General description - radio system “RCD 310” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
9.2 Overview of fitting locations - radio system “RCD 310” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
9.3 Removing and installing radio system “RCD 310” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
9.4 Connector pin assignment - radio system “RCD 310” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
9.5 Anti-theft coding - radio system “RCD 310” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
9.6 Adapting components - radio system “RCD 310” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
10 Radio navigation system (RNS) with monochrome display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
10.1 General description - radio navigation system with monochrome display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
10.2 Fitting location overview - radio navigation system with monochrome display . . . . . . . . . . 77
10.3 Removing and installing radio navigation system with monochrome display . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
10.4 Connector pin assignment - radio navigation system with monochrome display . . . . . . . . 81
10.5 Anti-theft coding - radio navigation system with monochrome display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
10.6 Adapting components - radio navigation system with monochrome display . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
11 Radio navigation system “RNS-MFD 1” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
11.1 General description - radio navigation system “RNS-MFD 1” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
11.2 Fitting location overview - radio navigation system “RNS-MFD 1” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
11.3 Removing and installing radio navigation system “RNS-MFD 1” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
11.4 Removing and installing traffic information control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
11.5 Connector pin assignment - radio navigation system “RNS-MFD 1” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
11.6 Anti-theft coding - radio navigation system “RNS-MFD 1” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
11.7 Adapting components - radio navigation system “RNS-MFD 1” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
12 Radio navigation systems “RNS 2-CD” and “RNS 2-DVD” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
12.1 General description - radio navigation systems “RNS 2-CD” and “RNS 2-DVD” . . . . . . . . 101
12.2 Fitting location overview - radio navigation systems “RNS 2-CD” and “RNS 2-DVD” . . . . 102
12.3 Removing and installing radio navigation systems “RNS 2-CD” and “RNS 2-DVD” . . . . . . 104
12.4 Connector pin assignment - radio navigation systems “RNS 2-CD” and “RNS 2-DVD” . . 106
12.5 Anti-theft coding - radio navigation systems “RNS 2-CD” and “RNS 2-DVD” . . . . . . . . . . 110
12.6 Adapting components - radio navigation systems “RNS 2-CD” and “RNS 2-DVD” . . . . . . 112
13 Radio navigation system “RNS 310” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
13.1 General description - radio navigation system “RNS 310” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
13.2 Overview of fitting locations - radio navigation system “RNS 310” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
13.3 Removing and installing radio navigation system “RNS 310” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
13.4 Pin assignment - radio navigation system “RNS 310” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
13.5 Anti-theft coding - radio navigation system “RNS 310” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
13.6 Adapting components - radio navigation system “RNS 310” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
14 Radio navigation system “RNS 315” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
14.1 General description - radio navigation system “RNS 315” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
14.2 Overview of fitting locations - radio navigation system “RNS 315” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
14.3 Removing and installing radio navigation system “RNS 315” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
14.4 Pin assignment - radio navigation system “RNS 315” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
14.5 Anti-theft coding - radio navigation system “RNS 315” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
14.6 Adapting components - radio navigation system “RNS 315” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
15 Radio navigation system “RNS 510” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
15.1 General description - radio navigation system “RNS 510” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
15.2 Overview of fitting locations - radio navigation system “RNS 510” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
15.3 Removing and installing radio navigation system “RNS 510” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
15.4 Pin assignment - radio navigation system “RNS 510” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
15.5 Anti-theft coding - radio navigation system “RNS 510” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
15.6 Adapting components - radio navigation system “RNS 510” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

ii Contents
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

16 Multimedia system control unit J650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151


16.1 General description - multimedia system control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
16.2 Fitting location overview - multimedia system control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
16.3 Removing and installing multimedia control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
16.4 Removing and installing the plug-in connection for the multimedia control unit . . . . . . . . . . 154
17 CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
17.1 Removing and installing CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
18 TV tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
18.1 Removing and installing TV tuner, vehicles as of model year 2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
19 Connection for external audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
19.1 General description - connection for external audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
19.2 Removing and installing connection for external audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
19.3 Connector pin assignment - connection for external audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
20 Sound system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
20.1 General description - sound system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
20.2 Removing and installing front mid-range and treble loudspeakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
20.3 Removing and installing rear mid-range and treble loudspeakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
20.4 Removing and installing front bass loudspeakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
20.5 Removing and installing rear bass loudspeakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
20.6 Removing and installing rear loudspeakers in Camper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
21 Sound system amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
21.1 General description - sound system amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
21.2 System overview - sound system amplifier, vehicles up to model year 2009 . . . . . . . . . . 174
21.3 System overview - sound system amplifier, vehicles as of model year 2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
21.4 Removing and installing amplifier for sound system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
21.5 Connector pin assignment - sound system amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
22 Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
22.1 Components of Rear Seat Entertainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
22.2 Overview of fitting locations – Rear Seat Entertainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
22.3 Removing and installing Rear Seat Entertainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
22.4 Removing and installing interior light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
22.5 Changing batteries in headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
22.6 Changing batteries in remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
22.7 Pin assignment – Rear Seat Entertainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
22.8 Fuse assignment - rear seat entertainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
23 “Digital voice enhancement” system (DVE), vehicles up to model year 2009 . . . . . . . . . . 190
23.1 General description - “digital voice enhancement” system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
23.2 Fitting location overview - “digital voice enhancement” system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
23.3 Removing and installing “digital voice enhancement control unit” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
23.4 Connector pin assignment - “digital voice enhancement control unit” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
23.5 Removing and installing “digital voice enhancement” microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
23.6 Coding “digital voice enhancement” control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
24 “Digital voice enhancement” system (DVE), vehicles as of model year 2010 . . . . . . . . . . 199
24.1 General description - “digital voice enhancement” system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
24.2 Fitting location overview - “digital voice enhancement” system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
24.3 System overview - “digital voice enhancement” system (DVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
24.4 Removing and installing “digital voice enhancement control unit” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
24.5 Adapting digital voice enhancement microphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
25 Telephone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
25.1 General description - telephone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
25.2 Overview of fitting locations - telephone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
25.3 Fitting location overview - telephone system in rear passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . 210
25.4 System overview - preparation for mobile telephone, vehicles as of 05.2007 . . . . . . . . . . 212
25.5 System overview - preparation for mobile telephone, vehicles as of model year 2010 . . . . 215

Contents iii
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

25.6 Removing and installing telephone bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220


25.7 Removing and installing handset, telephone system in rear passenger compartment . . . . 225
25.8 Removing and installing mobile telephone operating electronics control unit . . . . . . . . . . 226
25.9 Removing and installing telephone transmitter and receiver unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
25.10 Removing and installing telephone system microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
25.11 Removing and installing adapter box for telephone system in rear passenger compartment
........................................................................ 233
25.12 Removing and installing loudspeaker control unit for telephone system in rear passenger
compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
25.13 Removing and installing emergency assistance call button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
26 Aerial systems, vehicles up to model year 2009 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
26.1 General description - aerial systems, vehicles up to model year 2009 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
26.2 Fitting location overview - diversity aerial system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
26.3 Transmitting power - aerial systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
26.4 Removing and installing aerial selection control unit J515 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
26.5 Removing and installing aerial amplifier for side window aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
26.6 Removing and installing windscreen aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
26.7 Removing and installing bracket of telephone, navigation system and auxiliary heater aerial
R66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
26.8 Renewal of aerial wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
27 Aerial systems, vehicles as of model year 2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
27.1 General description - aerial systems, vehicles as of model year 2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
27.2 Overview of fitting locations - aerial systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
27.3 Fitting location overview - aerial in modular exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
27.4 Overview of fitting locations - internet access aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
27.5 Removing and installing aerial films for AM/FM/TV/DAB in modular exterior mirror . . . . . . 257
27.6 Removing and installing aerial film for GSM/UMTS telephone in modular exterior mirror . . 258
27.7 Removing and installing aerial for navigation in modular exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
27.8 Removing and installing aerial for AM/FM/DAB in bow-mounted exterior mirror . . . . . . . . 262
27.9 Removing and installing telephone aerial (GSM) in bow-mounted exterior mirror . . . . . . . . 263
27.10 Removing and installing roof aerial for telephone system in rear passenger compartment
........................................................................ 264
27.11 Removing and installing front roof aerial R216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
27.12 Renewal of aerial wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
28 “WiFi” internet access and “GPS” system, vehicles with “Business” equipment level, as of
model year 2012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
28.1 General description - “WiFi” internet access and “GPS” system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
28.2 System overview - “WiFi” internet access and “GPS” system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
28.3 Removing and installing internet access control unit J666 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
28.4 Internet access control unit J666 - LED indicator conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
28.5 Internet access control unit J666 - troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
29 Reversing camera system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
29.1 General description - reversing camera system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
29.2 Overview of fitting locations - reversing camera system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
29.3 Removing and installing reversing camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
29.4 Removing reversing camera from camera housing and installing it into camera housing . . 276
29.5 Removing and installing reversing camera system control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
29.6 Coding reversing camera system control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
29.7 Calibrating reversing camera system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
30 Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
30.1 General description - multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
30.2 System overview - multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
30.3 Removing and installing multifunction buttons E440 / E441 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
30.4 Connector pin assignment - multifunction steering wheel control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

iv Contents
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

91 – Communication
1 Communication systems
(VRL012699; Edition 02.2019)
⇒ “1.1 General description - communication systems”,
page 1
⇒ “1.2 Fault finding - communication systems”, page 1
⇒ “1.3 Notes on performing repair work on communication sys‐
tems”, page 1
⇒ “1.4 Assembly overview - battery, transmitter and receiver unit,
fuse and wiring harness”, page 3
⇒ “1.5 Implementation of suppression measures”, page 4
⇒ “1.6 General notes on operating mobile telephones and two-
way radios”, page 4

1.1 General description - communication


systems
The most important components of the communication systems
in the Transporter include the radio or the radio/navigation sys‐
tem, the TV tuner, the telephone system, the aerial system, the
system for digital voice enhancement (DVE), the loudspeaker
systems, the CD changer and the sound system amplifier.
Some items of equipment are only available as options. This
means that not all systems are installed in every vehicle.

Note

♦ When faced with complaints, it is absolutely necessary to


know the functions and operation of the communication sys‐
tems.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Operating instructions
♦ In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the ⇒ vehicle
diagnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode ⇒ Current
flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.

1.2 Fault finding - communication systems


The communication systems are equipped with self-diagnosis.
For fault finding, use vehicle diagnosis, testing and information
system in “Guided fault finding” function.

1.3 Notes on performing repair work on


communication systems
Batteries must be disconnected before starting repair work ⇒
Electrical system; Repair Group 27; Starter, current supply; Bat‐
tery; Disconnecting and connecting battery .
Use valid current flow diagram ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical
fault finding and Fitting locations.
For removing and installing trims, refer to ⇒ General body repairs,
interior; Rep. gr. 70 or ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep. gr.
66 .

1. Communication systems 1
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Observe manufacturer's operating and installation instructions for


mobile telephones, two-way radios and aerials.
Secure wiring harnesses with cable ties. Wrap connectors with
foam tubes to avoid rattling noises.
Transmitting power and possible fitting locations:
Volkswagen permits the installation and operation of radio trans‐
mitter units if the transmitted power at the point of the aerial base
listed in the table ⇒ page 240 is not exceeded. Prescribed aerial
fitting locations can also be found in the table.
The limits according to VDE 0848 part 2 (maximum permitted ra‐
diation strength for human safety) must be adhered to, if neces‐
sary, by reducing the transmitting power.
Voltage supply:
When a transmitter and receiver unit is retrofitted in the vehicle,
the battery is used for connecting the positive and negative wires.
In addition, the wiring harness must be manufactured:
♦ Positive voltage supply via a red wire with 2.5 mm2 cross sec‐
tion.
♦ Negative voltage supply via a brown wire with 2.5 mm2 cross
section.
The positive wire must have a fuse located in the immediate vi‐
cinity of the battery. For this purpose, a fuse holder must be
secured next to the battery. Both wires must be enclosed in an
insulating sleeve.
Appropriate connections must be fitted at the battery end.
Proceed according to unit's operating instructions on side of unit.
The additional wiring harness must be routed separately from ve‐
hicle wiring. Distance must be at least 10 cm.

Note

♦ Some telephone systems and two-way radios require an ad‐


ditional terminal 15 (ignition). In this case, a black line con‐
nection with 1.5 mm2 cross-section must be routed from the
transmitter/receiver unit to terminal 15a ⇒ Current flow dia‐
grams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations
♦ When laying the wiring, ensure that wiring is not routed parallel
to factory wiring.

Aerial and aerial wiring:


A shielded wire must be used between the transmitter and re‐
ceiver unit and the aerial. The shield must contact both the unit
and the aerial.
At the same time, ensure a good and continuous earth connection
between the aerial base point cable and the vehicle body.
The transmitter must be used only when all components are prop‐
erly matched with each other to prevent interference in the aerial
wiring. To be sure, perform an output test to check and to match
the system.
Other additional installations:
The installation of additional electronic devices such as business
equipment (e.g. TV, fax) or household equipment (e.g. electric
cooler box) is permitted only if these appliances are marked with
a CE or “e” sign (applies to Europe only).

2 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Voltage supply is likewise to be provided via a separate wiring


harness and equipped with a fuse.

1.4 Assembly overview - battery, transmitter and receiver unit, fuse and wiring
harness

1 - Positive connection
❑ Red wire with appropri‐
ate connection
2 - To terminal 15a
❑ Connection to terminal
15a: ⇒ Current flow dia‐
grams, Electrical fault
finding and Fitting loca‐
tions
❑ Ensure that this wire is
protected by a fuse.
❑ Fuse maximum 15 A
3 - Aerial earth
❑ Ensure good earth con‐
nection to body.
❑ Treat fitting location of
aerial with appropriate
corrosion protection.
4 - Transmitter and receiver
aerial
❑ Fitting locations: table
on page ⇒ page 240 .
5 - Shielded aerial cable
❑ Cable with coaxial con‐
nector
6 - Transmitter and receiver
unit, telephone or two-way ra‐
dio unit
7 - Wiring harness
❑ Positive voltage supply
via a red wire with
2.5 mm2 cross section.
❑ Negative voltage supply
via a brown wire with 2.5 mm2 cross section.
❑ If necessary, wire to terminal 15a via a black wire with 1.5 mm2 cross-section.
8 - Fuse holder
❑ Install in immediate vicinity of battery.
9 - To starter
10 - Battery
❑ Fitting location in engine compartment
11 - Negative wire
12 - Body earth

1. Communication systems 3
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1.5 Implementation of suppression meas‐


ures
All electrical consumers in the vehicle are individually suppressed
at factory.
This includes all sensors, actuators and all electrical motors in the
vehicles as well as the controllers in the control units which might
create high-frequency interference.
To suppress interference, electrical components such as capac‐
itors, coils and diodes are directly installed in the electrical com‐
ponents.
Interference-suppressing components are also installed in the
connector housings of electrical consumers.
The earth cables formerly employed for noise suppression are no
longer used because noise suppression measures now need to
be applied as close as possible to the sources of interference.

1.6 General notes on operating mobile tele‐


phones and two-way radios
Mobile telephones or portable two-way radios must not be used
in the vehicle without a separate external aerial.

Note

♦ The exception to this is the operation of “UTP LOW” and “UTP


Premium” preparation for mobile telephone in accordance with
the regulations, via which corresponding Bluetooth radio sig‐
nals in the vehicle interior are transmitted between the mobile
telephone - R54- and the telephone transmitter and receiver
unit - J412- . The transmission power in this case is limited to
1 mW (transmission class III).
♦ An aerial cable with a corresponding exterior aerial must be
present on the mobile phone holder or the phone transmitter
and receiver unit.

♦ Remote controls (e.g. for garage door opener) and cordless


units (e.g. keyboard or PC mouse) may only be used in the
vehicle if the transmitted output is max. 100 mW.
♦ An “e identification” is required for mobile two-way radios (ap‐
plies for Europe only).
♦ Mobile telephones or other transmitting equipment (business
equipment) which are not original vehicle equipment parts
must have “CE identification” (applies to Europe only).
♦ Always observe the manufacturer's operating and installation
instructions for mobile phones, two-way radios and aerials.
♦ The optimum unit range can be attained only by using an ex‐
ternal aerial.
♦ When telephone and two-way radio systems are properly in‐
stalled, there is no danger to safety systems like, for example,
ABS or airbags. However, it is a prerequisite that there has
been no modification of their installation. Routing wiring par‐
allel to such systems must be avoided.
♦ When mobile telephones or two-way radios are used, exces‐
sive electromagnetic fields may occur in the vehicle interior
whether or not the external aerial has been properly installed.
In this case, detrimental effects to health as well as malfunctions
of vehicle electronics cannot be ruled out.

4 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

The installation and operation of two-way radios with a transmit‐


ting power above 10 watts for the radio communication services
listed in the table are permitted only under the following condi‐
tions:
• The transmitting power at the point of the aerial base (see unit
manufacturer's specifications) must not exceed the relevant
maximum values.
• No deviation from aerial installation locations listed in the table
is permitted.
Transmitting power and aerial fitting locations table
⇒ page 240 .

1. Communication systems 5
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

2 “Alpha” radio system


⇒ “2.1 General description - Alpha radio system”, page 6
⇒ “2.2 Fitting location overview - ALPHA radio system”,
page 6
⇒ “2.3 Removing and installing ALPHA radio system”,
page 8
⇒ “2.4 Connector pin assignment - ALPHA radio system”,
page 9
⇒ “2.5 Anti-theft coding - ALPHA radio system”, page 10

2.1 General description - “Alpha” radio sys‐


tem
“Alpha” radio system

Note

♦ When faced with complaints, it is absolutely necessary to un‐


derstand the function and the operation of the radio.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Operating manual
♦ The anti-theft coding uses a fixed code ⇒ Operating manual .
♦ When repairing or fault finding ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Elec‐
trical fault finding and Fitting locations
♦ The “ALPHA” radio unit does not have self-diagnosis capabil‐
ity.
♦ When the battery is reconnected, check the items of equip‐
ment in the vehicle (radio, clock, convenience electronics etc.)
with reference to the workshop manual and/or operating in‐
structions and adjust them if necessary.

The “ALPHA” radio system comprises the radio and loudspeakers


in the front doors and dash panel.
A bass speaker is built into each of the front doors. 2 loudspeaker
systems with a mid-range speaker and a treble speaker are built
into the dash panel.
The radio system includes the windscreen aerial with aerial am‐
plifier.
The radio system in the “Caravelle” version of the Transporter is
equipped with a side-window aerial with an amplifier in the rear
right window.

Note

Neither a CD changer or player nor a sound system amplifier can


be connected to the “ALPHA” radio.

2.2 Fitting location overview - “ALPHA” radio system

6 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Aerial amplifier radio - R45-


❑ Installed above right
rear side window.
❑ Installed only in the
“Caravelle” version
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
2 - Aerial - R11-
❑ Aerial in rear right side
window
❑ Installed only in the
“Caravelle” version
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
3 - Front left bass loudspeaker
- R21- and front right bass
loudspeaker - R23-
❑ Installed in lower sec‐
tion of the front doors.
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 168
4 - Front loudspeaker systems
in dash panel
❑ Installed in dash panel
on left and right.
❑ Front left treble loud‐
speaker - R20- and front
right treble loudspeaker
- R22-
❑ Front left mid-range
loudspeaker - R103-
and front right mid-
range loudspeaker -
R104-
❑ Removing and installing, vehicles with padded dash panel ⇒ page 164 .
❑ Removing and installing, vehicles without padded dash panel ⇒ page 166 .
5 - Radio - R-
❑ “ALPHA”
❑ Fitting location: in centre console
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 8
❑ Anti-theft coding ⇒ page 10 .
❑ Connector pin assignment ⇒ page 9 .
6 - Aerial - R11-
❑ Aerial in windscreen.
❑ Not installed the “Caravelle” version
❑ Additional information: chapter "Aerial systems" ⇒ page 238 .

2. “Alpha” radio system 7


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

2.3 Removing and installing “ALPHA” radio


system

Note

♦ The part number for the radio can be found on a sticker on the
radio housing.
♦ Obtain the radio code number from the customer before re‐
moving the radio. If the radio has to be renewed, it is essential
to activate the anti-theft coding ⇒ Operating manual . The
customer must be informed of the new code number.

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Radio release tool - 3316-

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Push radio release tools - 3316- into the intended slots on left
and right of radio until they engage audibly.
– Pull out radio with radio release tools.
– Release and disconnect connectors on rear of unit.

8 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Press catch -arrow- on each side of unit and simultaneously


pull release tool out of the removed unit.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Connect connectors to radio and engage them.

Caution

Risk of damage to display and operating keys!


When inserting the radio system into the installation slot by
pressing against the display or operating keys, the unit could
become damaged.
When inserting the radio system never press against the dis‐
play or operating keys.

– Slide radio straightly into the dash panel until it locks into place
in the mounting frame.

2.4 Connector pin assignment - “ALPHA”


radio system
Multi-pin connector I, 10-pin, CD changer actuation and line in/
out
This connection is not assigned.

Multi-pin connector 2, 8-pin, loudspeaker outputs


1–2 - Not assigned
3 - Front right loudspeaker, positive
4 - Front right loudspeaker, negative
5 - Front left loudspeaker, positive
6 - Front left loudspeaker, negative
7–8 - Not assigned

2. “Alpha” radio system 9


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector III, 8-pin, voltage supply, mute switch


1 - Not assigned
2 - Mute
3 - Not assigned
4 - Connection for ignition-key-controlled switching on and off (S
contact)
5 - Not assigned
6 - Illumination, terminal 58b
7 - Battery positive, terminal 30
8 - Battery negative, terminal 31

2.5 Anti-theft coding - “ALPHA” radio sys‐


tem
The anti-theft coding function of the “ALPHA” radio system uses
a fixed code. Refer to ⇒ Operating manual .

10 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

3 “Beta” radio system


⇒ “3.1 General description - BETA radio system”, page 11
⇒ “3.2 Fitting location overview - BETA radio system”,
page 11
⇒ “3.3 Removing and installing BETA radio system”, page 13
⇒ “3.4 Connector pin assignment - BETA radio system”,
page 14
⇒ “3.5 Anti-theft coding - BETA radio system”, page 15
⇒ “3.6 Adapting components - BETA radio system”, page 15

3.1 General description - “BETA” radio sys‐


tem
“Beta” radio system

Note

♦ When faced with complaints, it is absolutely necessary to un‐


derstand the function and the operation of the radio.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Operating manual
♦ The anti-theft coding uses a fixed code ⇒ Operating manual .
♦ In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the ⇒ vehicle
diagnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode ⇒ Current
flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
♦ When the battery is reconnected, check the items of equip‐
ment in the vehicle (radio, clock, convenience electronics etc.)
with reference to the workshop manual and/or operating in‐
structions and adjust them if necessary.

The “BETA” radio system comprises the radio and loudspeakers


in the front doors and dash panel.
A bass speaker is built into each of the front doors. 2 loudspeaker
systems with a mid-range speaker and a treble speaker are built
into the dash panel.
The radio system includes the windscreen aerial with aerial am‐
plifier.
The radio system in the “Caravelle” version of the Transporter is
equipped with a side-window aerial with an amplifier in the rear
right window.
Functionality can be extended by connecting a CD changer/play‐
er as well as a telephone ⇒ page 14 .

3.2 Fitting location overview - “BETA” radio system

3. “Beta” radio system 11


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Aerial amplifier radio - R45-


❑ Installed above right
rear side window.
❑ Installed only in the
“Caravelle” version
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
2 - Aerial - R11-
❑ Aerial in rear right side
window
❑ Installed only in the
“Caravelle” version
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
3 - Front left bass loudspeaker
- R21- and front right bass
loudspeaker - R23-
❑ Installed in lower sec‐
tion of the front doors.
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 168
4 - Front loudspeaker systems
in dash panel
❑ Installed in dash panel
on left and right.
❑ Front left treble loud‐
speaker - R20- and front
right treble loudspeaker
- R22-
❑ Front left mid-range
loudspeaker - R103-
and front right mid-
range loudspeaker -
R104-
❑ Removing and installing, vehicles with padded dash panel ⇒ page 164 .
❑ Removing and installing, vehicles without padded dash panel ⇒ page 166 .
5 - Radio - R-
❑ Here, “BETA” radio
❑ Fitting location: in centre console
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 13
❑ Anti-theft coding ⇒ page 15 .
❑ Adapting components ⇒ page 15
❑ Connector pin assignment ⇒ page 14 .
6 - Aerial - R11-
❑ Aerial in windscreen.
❑ Not installed the “Caravelle” version
❑ Additional information: chapter "Aerial systems" ⇒ page 238 .
7 - CD changer - R41-
❑ 6-disc CD changer
❑ Fitting location: under right front seat.
❑ Additional information: chapter "CD changer" ⇒ page 155 .

12 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

3.3 Removing and installing “BETA” radio


system

Note

♦ The part number for the radio can be found on a sticker on the
radio housing.
♦ Obtain the radio code number from the customer before re‐
moving the radio. If the radio has to be renewed, it is essential
to activate the anti-theft coding ⇒ Operating manual . The
customer must be informed of the new code number.

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Radio release tool - 3316-

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Push radio release tools - 3316- into the intended slots on left
and right of radio until they engage audibly.
– Pull out radio with radio release tools.
– Release and disconnect connectors on rear of unit.

3. “Beta” radio system 13


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Press catch -arrow- on each side of unit and simultaneously


pull release tool out of the removed unit.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Connect connectors to radio and engage them.

Caution

Risk of damage to display and operating keys!


When inserting the radio system into the installation slot by
pressing against the display or operating keys, the unit could
become damaged.
When inserting the radio system never press against the dis‐
play or operating keys.

– Slide radio straightly into the dash panel until it locks into place
in the mounting frame.
– Check coding of radio and re-code if necessary ⇒ page 15 .

3.4 Connector pin assignment - “BETA” ra‐


dio system

Note

20-pin connector 1 consists of 3 parts that are marked with dif‐


ferent colours:

Multi-pin connector 1, 20-pin, part 1, yellow, line out


This connection is not assigned.

Multi-pin connector 1, 20-pin, part 2, green, telephone


7 - Telephone audio input signal, positive
11 - Remote control, control wire, REM
12 - Telephone audio input signal, negative

14 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector I, 20-pin, part 3, blue, CD changer control, line


in
13 - CD changer, DATA IN (data exchange for CD changer control
from CD changer to radio)
14 - CD changer, DATA OUT (data exchange for CD changer
control from radio to CD changer)
15 - CD changer, CLOCK (internal check protocol for data flow
monitoring)
16 - CD changer, voltage supply, positive, terminal 30
17 - CD changer, control signal
18 - CD changer, left and right channels, negative
19 - CD changer, left channel, positive
20 - CD changer, right channel, positive

Multi-pin connector 2, 8-pin, loudspeaker outputs


1–2 - Not assigned
3 - Front right loudspeaker, positive
4 - Front right loudspeaker, negative
5 - Front left loudspeaker, positive
6 - Front left loudspeaker, negative
7–8 - Not assigned

Multi-pin connector III, 8-pin, voltage supply, mute switch


1 - GALA amplifier adaptation
2 - Mute
3 - Self-diagnosis, K wire
4 - Connection for ignition-key-controlled switching on and off, S
contact
5 - Control signal for anti-theft coding, SAFE, terminal 30
6 - Illumination, terminal 58b
7 - Battery positive, terminal 30
8 - Battery negative, terminal 31

3.5 Anti-theft coding - “BETA” radio system


The anti-theft coding function of the “BETA” radio system uses a
fixed code. Refer to ⇒ Operating manual .

3.6 Adapting components - “BETA” radio


system
Adapting radio components:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .

3. “Beta” radio system 15


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then


the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio system
♦ Radio functions

16 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

4 “Gamma” radio system


⇒ “4.1 General description - GAMMA radio system”, page 17
⇒ “4.2 Fitting location overview - GAMMA radio system”,
page 17
⇒ “4.3 Removing and installing GAMMA radio system”,
page 19
⇒ “4.4 Connector pin assignment - GAMMA radio system”,
page 20
⇒ “4.5 Anti-theft coding - GAMMA radio system”, page 22
⇒ “4.6 Adapting components - GAMMA radio system”,
page 22

4.1 General description - “GAMMA” radio


system
“Gamma” radio system

Note

♦ When faced with complaints, it is absolutely necessary to un‐


derstand the function and the operation of the radio.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Owner's manual
♦ The anti-theft coding uses a fixed code ⇒ Operating manual .
♦ In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the ⇒ vehicle
diagnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode ⇒ Current
flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
♦ When the battery is reconnected, check the items of equip‐
ment in the vehicle (radio, clock, convenience electronics etc.)
with reference to the workshop manual and/or operating in‐
structions and adjust them if necessary.

The “GAMMA” radio system comprises the radio and loudspeak‐


ers in the front doors and dash panel.
A bass speaker is built into each of the front doors. 2 loudspeaker
systems with a mid-range speaker and a treble speaker are built
into the dash panel.
The radio system includes the windscreen aerial with aerial am‐
plifier.
The radio system in the “Caravelle” version of the Transporter is
equipped with a side-window aerial with an amplifier in the rear
right window.
Functionality can be extended by connecting a CD changer/play‐
er as well as a telephone ⇒ page 20 .

4.2 Fitting location overview - “GAMMA” radio system

4. “Gamma” radio system 17


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Aerial amplifier radio - R45-


❑ Installed above right
rear side window.
❑ Installed only in the
“Caravelle” version
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
2 - Aerial - R11-
❑ Aerial in rear right side
window
❑ Installed only in the
“Caravelle” version
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
3 - Rear loudspeaker systems
❑ The rear loudspeaker
systems are available
as an optional extra
❑ Installed in rear side
panel trims.
❑ Removing and installing
rear left bass loud‐
speaker - R15- and rear
right bass loudspeaker -
R17- ⇒ page 170
❑ Removing and installing
rear left mid-range loud‐
speaker - R105- and
rear right mid-range
loudspeaker - R106-
⇒ page 167
❑ Removing and installing
rear left treble loud‐
speaker - R14- and rear
right treble loudspeaker - R16- ⇒ page 167
❑ Removing and installing rear loudspeakers in Camper, ⇒ page 171
4 - Front left bass loudspeaker - R21- and front right bass loudspeaker - R23-
❑ Installed in lower section of the front doors.
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 168
5 - Front loudspeaker systems in dash panel
❑ Installed in dash panel on left and right.
❑ Front left treble loudspeaker - R20- and front right treble loudspeaker - R22-
❑ Front left mid-range loudspeaker - R103- and front right mid-range loudspeaker - R104-
❑ Removing and installing, vehicles with padded dash panel ⇒ page 164 .
❑ Removing and installing, vehicles without padded dash panel ⇒ page 166 .
6 - Radio - R-
❑ “GAMMA”
❑ Fitting location: in centre console
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 19
❑ Anti-theft coding ⇒ page 22 .
❑ Adapting components ⇒ page 22
❑ Connector pin assignment ⇒ page 20 .

18 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

7 - Aerial - R11-
❑ Aerial in windscreen.
❑ Not installed the “Caravelle” version
❑ Additional information: chapter "Aerial systems" ⇒ page 238 .
8 - CD changer - R41-
❑ 6-disc CD changer
❑ Fitting location: under right front seat.
❑ Additional information: chapter "CD changer" ⇒ page 155 .

4.3 Removing and installing “GAMMA” radio


system

Note

♦ The part number for the radio can be found on a sticker on the
radio housing.
♦ Obtain the radio code number from the customer before re‐
moving the radio. If the radio has to be renewed, it is essential
to activate the anti-theft coding ⇒ Operating manual . The
customer must be informed of the new code number.

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Radio release tool - 3316-

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Push radio release tools - 3316- into the intended slots on left
and right of radio -arrows- until they engage audibly.

4. “Gamma” radio system 19


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Pull out radio with radio release tools.


– Release and disconnect connectors on rear of unit.

– Press catch -arrow- on each side of unit and simultaneously


pull release tool out of the removed unit.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Connect connectors to radio and engage them.

Caution

Risk of damage to display and operating keys!


When inserting the radio system into the installation slot by
pressing against the display or operating keys, the unit could
become damaged.
When inserting the radio system never press against the dis‐
play or operating keys.

– Slide radio straightly into the dash panel until it locks into place
in the mounting frame.
– Check coding of radio and re-code if necessary ⇒ page 22 .

4.4 Connector pin assignment - “GAMMA”


radio system

Note

20-pin connector 1 consists of 3 parts that are marked with dif‐


ferent colours:

Multi-pin connector 1, 20-pin, part 1, yellow, line out


1 - Line out rear left, positive
2 - Line out rear right, positive
3 - Line out, negative
4 - Line out front left, positive
5 - Line out front right, positive
6 - Switched positive

20 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector 1, 20-pin, part 2, green, telephone


7 - Telephone audio input signal, positive
8 - Second display, CLOCK (internal check protocol for data flow
monitoring)
9 - Second display, DATA (data exchange between radio and
dash panel insert)
10 - Second display, ENA
11 - Remote control, control wire, REM
12 - Telephone audio input signal, negative

Multi-pin connector I, 20-pin, part 3, blue, CD changer control, line


in
13 - CD changer, DATA IN (data exchange for CD changer control
from CD changer to radio)
14 - CD changer, DATA OUT (data exchange for CD changer
control from radio to CD changer)
15 - CD changer, CLOCK (internal check protocol for data flow
monitoring)
16 - CD changer, voltage supply, positive, terminal 30
17 - CD changer, control signal
18 - CD changer, left and right channels, negative
19 - CD changer, left channel, positive
20 - CD changer, right channel, positive

Multi-pin connector 2, 8-pin, loudspeaker outputs


1 - Rear right loudspeaker
2 - Rear right loudspeaker, negative
3 - Front right loudspeaker, positive
4 - Front right loudspeaker, negative
5 - Front left loudspeaker, positive
6 - Front left loudspeaker, negative
7 - Rear left loudspeaker, positive
8 - Rear left loudspeaker, negative

Multi-pin connector III, 8-pin, voltage supply, mute switch


1 - GALA amplifier adaptation
2 - Mute
3 - Self-diagnosis, K wire
4 - Connection for ignition-key-controlled switching on and off, S
contact
5 - Control signal for anti-theft coding, SAFE, terminal 30
6 - Illumination, terminal 58b
7 - Battery positive, terminal 30
8 - Battery negative, terminal 31

4. “Gamma” radio system 21


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

4.5 Anti-theft coding - “GAMMA” radio sys‐


tem
The anti-theft coding function of the “GAMMA” radio system uses
a fixed code. Refer to ⇒ Operating manual .

4.6 Adapting components - “GAMMA” radio


system
Adapting radio components:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio system
♦ Radio functions

22 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

5. “DELTA” radio system 23


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

5 “DELTA” radio system


⇒ “5.1 General description - DELTA radio system”, page 24
⇒ “5.2 Fitting location overview - DELTA radio system”,
page 25
⇒ “5.3 Removing and installing DELTA radio system”,
page 26
⇒ “5.4 Connector pin assignment - DELTA radio system”,
page 28
⇒ “5.5 Anti-theft coding - DELTA radio system”, page 31
⇒ “5.6 Adapting components - DELTA radio system”, page 32

5.1 General description - “DELTA” radio


system
“DELTA” radio system

Note

♦ When faced with complaints, it is absolutely necessary to un‐


derstand the function and the operation of the radio.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Operating manual
♦ The anti-theft coding is a fixed code ⇒ page 31 .
♦ In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the ⇒ vehicle
diagnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode ⇒ Current
flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
♦ When the battery is reconnected, check the items of equip‐
ment in the vehicle (radio, clock, convenience electronics etc.)
with reference to the workshop manual and/or operating in‐
structions and adjust them if necessary.

The “Delta” radio consists of the radio and the loudspeakers in


the doors, dash panel and passenger compartment.
The radio is equipped with four loudspeaker outputs.
The loudspeakers are designed as 3-way systems and are in‐
stalled in the following manner:
♦ one bass speaker in each front door
♦ Two systems in the dash panel, each with a mid-range and a
treble loudspeaker
♦ One bass speaker and a system comprising a mid-range and
a treble loudspeaker on each side (left and right) in rear of
vehicle
To extend the functions, a CD changer, a telephone and an am‐
plifier may also be connected.
Audio CDs may be played in the CD drive.
The CD drive integrated into the radio can play CDs in both “CD-
R” as well as “CD-RW” formats.

24 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Note

♦ Music CDs with 8 cm diameter (mini discs) cannot be played.


♦ Mixed-mode CDs (CDs having both computer data and music)
cannot be played.

Depending on version of vehicle, the diversity aerial system or the


windscreen aerial is used.

5.2 Fitting location overview - “DELTA” radio system

1 - CD changer - R41-
❑ 6-disc CD changer
❑ Fitting location: under
right front seat.
❑ Additional information:
chapter "CD changer"
⇒ page 155 .
2 - Sound system amplifier -
R12-
❑ Installed under right
front seat.
❑ Optional equipment
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Sound system
amplifier" ⇒ page 173 .
3 - Aerial selection control unit
- J515-
❑ Installed above right
rear side window.
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
4 - Aerial amplifier radio - R45-
❑ Installed above left and
right rear side windows.
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
5 - Aerial - R11-
❑ Aerial in left and right
rear side windows.
❑ The diversity aerial sys‐
tem consists of four aer‐
ials installed in the rear
side windows.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Aerial systems" ⇒ page 238 .
6 - Bass loudspeaker (subwoofer)
❑ Optional extra in conjunction with sound amplifier
❑ Installed behind rear left side panel trim.
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 70 ; Trims, interior
7 - Rear loudspeaker systems
❑ Installed in rear side panel trims.

5. “DELTA” radio system 25


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019
❑ Removing and installing rear left bass loudspeaker - R15- and rear right bass loudspeaker - R17-
⇒ page 170
❑ Removing and installing rear left mid-range loudspeaker - R105- and rear right mid-range loudspeaker
- R106- ⇒ page 167
❑ Removing and installing rear left treble loudspeaker - R14- and rear right treble loudspeaker - R16-
⇒ page 167
❑ Removing and installing rear loudspeakers in Camper, ⇒ page 171
8 - Front left bass loudspeaker - R21- and front right bass loudspeaker - R23-
❑ Installed in lower section of the front doors.
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 168
9 - Front loudspeaker systems in dash panel
❑ Installed in dash panel on left and right.
❑ Front left treble loudspeaker - R20- and front right treble loudspeaker - R22-
❑ Front left mid-range loudspeaker - R103- and front right mid-range loudspeaker - R104-
❑ Removing and installing, vehicles with padded dash panel ⇒ page 164 .
❑ Removing and installing, vehicles without padded dash panel ⇒ page 166 .
10 - Radio - R-
❑ “DELTA”
❑ Fitting location: in centre console
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 26
❑ Anti-theft coding ⇒ page 31 .
❑ Adapting components ⇒ page 32
❑ Connector pin assignment ⇒ page 28 .
11 - Aerial - R11-
❑ Aerial in windscreen.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Aerial systems" ⇒ page 238 .

5.3 Removing and installing “DELTA” radio


system

Note

♦ The part number for the radio can be found on a sticker on the
radio housing.
♦ Obtain the radio code number from the customer before re‐
moving the radio. If the radio has to be renewed, it is essential
to activate the anti-theft coding ⇒ Operating manual . The
customer must be informed of the new code number.

Special tools and workshop equipment required

26 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

♦ Radio release tool - T10057-

Removing:
– Remove any CDs left in the unit ⇒ Operating manual .
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Push radio release tools - T10057- into the intended slots on
left and right of radio until they engage audibly.
– Using release tools -arrow-, pull radio out of installation slot
until you can access connectors on rear of radio.

– Press together connector locking mechanism in direction of


-arrows-.

5. “DELTA” radio system 27


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Swivel locking bar up in -direction of arrow- and pull off con‐


nector.

– Release and disconnect connectors -arrows- of aerial con‐


nections.
– Remove radio completely.

– Press locking tabs -arrow- and pull release tools out forwards.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Connect connectors to radio and engage them.

Caution

Risk of damage to display and operating keys!


When inserting the radio system into the installation slot by
pressing against the display or operating keys, the unit could
become damaged.
When inserting the radio system never press against the dis‐
play or operating keys.

– Slide radio straightly into the dash panel until it locks into place
in the mounting frame.
– Check coding of radio and re-code if necessary ⇒ page 32 .

5.4 Connector pin assignment - “DELTA” radio system

28 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Multi-pin connector 1, loud‐


speaker outputs, pin assign‐
ment ⇒ page 29 .
2 - Multi-pin connector 2, volt‐
age supply, CAN bus and mute
switch, pin assignment
⇒ page 30 .
3 - Multi-pin connector 3, tele‐
phone audio input signals, pin
assignment ⇒ page 30 .
4 - Multi-pin connector 4, CD
changer control, pin assign‐
ment ⇒ page 30 .
5 - Aerial connection socket,
brown, pin assignment
⇒ page 31 .
6 - Aerial connection socket,
transparent, pin assignment
⇒ page 31 .

Multi-pin connector 1, 8-pin, loudspeaker outputs


1 - Rear right loudspeaker, positive
2 - Front right loudspeaker, positive
3 - Front left loudspeaker, positive
4 - Rear left loudspeaker, positive
5 - Rear right loudspeaker, negative
6 - Front right loudspeaker, negative
7 - Front left loudspeaker, negative
8 - Rear left loudspeaker, negative

5. “DELTA” radio system 29


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector 2, 8-pin, voltage supply, CAN bus, mute


switch
9 - CAN bus, positive
10 - CAN bus, negative
11 - Mute switch
12 - Terminal 31 voltage supply, negative
13 - Radio ON, control wire positive
14 - Warning contact (USA only)
15 - Terminal 30 voltage supply, positive
16 - Control signal for anti-theft coding, SAFE, terminal 30

Multi-pin connector 3, 12-pin, telephone audio output signals


1–5 - Not assigned
6 - Telephone audio input signal, negative
7–11 - Not assigned
12 - Telephone audio input signal, positive

Multi-pin connector 4, 12-pin, CD changer control


1 - Headphone audio signal output, right, positive
2 - CD changer, left and right channels, negative
3 - Headphone audio signal output, audio earth
4 - CD changer, voltage supply, positive, terminal 30
5 - Headphone audio signal output, left, positive
6 - CD changer, DATA OUT (data exchange for CD changer con‐
trol from radio to CD changer)
7 - Not assigned
8 - CD changer, left channel, positive
9 - CD changer, right channel, positive
10 - CD changer, control signal
11 - CD changer, DATA IN (data exchange for CD changer control
from CD changer to radio)
12 - CD changer, CLOCK (internal check protocol for data flow
monitoring)

30 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector 5, aerial connection


2 - Brown connection for aerial output signal to aerial selection
control unit
The aerial input signal from connection 1 is checked in the radio
and the result is output again via connection 2 to the aerial se‐
lection control unit. If the aerial signal being received is too weak,
this then switches to a different aerial (diversity function). The
customer will not be able to perceive this procedure audibly.

Multi-pin connector 6, aerial connection


1 - Transparent connection for aerial input signal from aerial se‐
lection control unit
The aerial input signal from connection 1 is checked in the radio
and the result is output again via connection 2 to the aerial se‐
lection control unit. If the aerial signal being received is too weak,
this then switches to a different aerial (diversity function). The
customer will not be able to perceive this procedure audibly.

5.5 Anti-theft coding - “DELTA” radio sys‐


tem
The “DELTA” radio is equipped with electronic comfort anti-theft
protection, which is effective in combination with the dash panel
insert.
After disconnecting the radio voltage supply, radio operation is
restored when reconnecting the voltage supply without entering
the code number. The prerequisites are that initial activation of
the anti-theft coding has been performed and the radio is recon‐
nected in the same vehicle.
Deactivating anti-theft coding:
A blocked radio unit can only be returned to normal operation by
entering the correct code number for the anti-theft coding.

Note

♦ The anti-theft code number is stuck on the radio card together


with the unit number ⇒ Operating manual .
♦ The radio card should not be kept in the vehicle for security
reasons. Request code number from customer, if necessary.
♦ If a radio is renewed, the code number of the replacement unit
also must be used.
♦ The customer must be informed that the code number has
changed.

– Obtain the code number of the unit, using the familiar EDP
systems, if necessary.
– Switch on radio.
The word “SAFE” appears in the display.

5. “DELTA” radio system 31


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Enter the code number affixed to the radio card, using station
buttons 1 to 4. One digit of the code is entered with each sta‐
tion button.
– Once the anti-theft code has been entered, press one of the
station scanning buttons for longer than 2 seconds. If the cor‐
rect code has been entered, after a short time a frequency will
be displayed automatically. The unit is now ready for use
again.

Note

If you enter an incorrect anti-theft code, you can immediately


make a new attempt to enter the correct code. If the wrong anti-
theft code is entered two times, the radio is blocked for one hour.
Leave the radio system and ignition switched on and repeat the
process for deactivating the anti-theft coding after one hour. You
always have two attempts to enter the code, then the radio will be
blocked for one hour.

5.6 Adapting components - “DELTA” radio


system
Adapting radio components:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio system
♦ Radio functions

32 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

6 Radio system “R 110”


⇒ “6.1 General description - radio system R 110 ”, page 33
⇒ “6.2 Fitting location overview - radio system R 110 ”,
page 33
⇒ “6.3 Removing and installing radio system R 110 ”, page 35
⇒ “6.4 Connector pin assignment - radio system R 110 ”,
page 37
⇒ “6.5 Anti-theft coding - radio system R 110 ”, page 39
⇒ “6.6 Adapting components - radio system R 110 ”, page 41

6.1 General description - radio system “R


110”
Radio system “R 110”

Note

♦ When faced with complaints, it is absolutely necessary to un‐


derstand the function and the operation of the radio.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Operating manual
♦ The anti-theft coding uses a fixed code ⇒ page 39 .
♦ In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the ⇒ vehicle
diagnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode ⇒ Current
flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
♦ When the battery is reconnected, check the items of equip‐
ment in the vehicle (radio, clock, convenience electronics etc.)
with reference to the workshop manual and/or operating in‐
structions and adjust them if necessary.

The “R 110” radio system comprises the radio and loudspeakers


in the front doors and dash panel.
A bass speaker is built into each of the front doors. 2 loudspeaker
systems with a mid-range speaker and a treble speaker are built
into the dash panel.
Optional rear loudspeakers may be fitted.
On vehicles from 06.07, wide-band loudspeakers are installed on
some vehicles or radio combinations. Therefore, no treble loud‐
speakers are fitted in the dash panel and in the rear left side panel.
For further information, see table ⇒ page 163 .
The radio system includes the windscreen aerial with aerial am‐
plifier.
The radio system in the “Caravelle” version of the Transporter is
equipped with a side-window aerial with an amplifier in the rear
right window.
Functionality can be extended by connecting a CD changer/play‐
er as well as a telephone.
An additional audio source which can be heard over the radio may
be connected via a connection for external radio sources. The
connections for external audio sources are located on the back‐
side of the unit ⇒ page 37 .

6.2 Fitting location overview - radio system “R 110”

6. Radio system “R 110” 33


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Aerial amplifier radio - R45-


❑ Installed above right
rear side window.
❑ Installed only in the
“Caravelle” version
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
2 - Aerial - R11-
❑ Aerial in rear right side
window
❑ Installed only in the
“Caravelle” version
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
3 - Rear loudspeaker systems
❑ On vehicles as of 06.07,
different loudspeaker
combinations are instal‐
led, which may possibly
differ from the ones de‐
scribed here. Additional
information:
⇒ page 163 .
❑ The rear loudspeaker
systems available as an
optional extra
❑ Installed in rear side
panel trims.
❑ Removing and installing
rear left bass loud‐
speaker - R15- and rear
right bass loudspeaker -
R17- ⇒ page 170
❑ Removing and installing
rear left mid-range loudspeaker - R105- and rear right mid-range loudspeaker - R106- ⇒ page 167
❑ Removing and installing rear left treble loudspeaker - R14- and rear right treble loudspeaker - R16-
⇒ page 167
❑ Removing and installing rear loudspeakers in Camper, ⇒ page 171
4 - Front left bass loudspeaker - R21- and front right bass loudspeaker - R23-
❑ On vehicles as of 06.07, different loudspeaker combinations are installed, which may possibly differ from
the ones described here. Additional information: ⇒ page 163 .
❑ Installed in lower section of the front doors.
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 168
5 - Front loudspeaker systems in dash panel
❑ On vehicles as of 06.07, different loudspeaker combinations are installed, which may possibly differ from
the ones described here. Additional information: ⇒ page 163 .
❑ Installed in dash panel on left and right.
❑ Front left treble loudspeaker - R20- and front right treble loudspeaker - R22-
❑ Front left mid-range loudspeaker - R103- and front right mid-range loudspeaker - R104-
❑ Removing and installing, vehicles with padded dash panel ⇒ page 164 .
❑ Removing and installing, vehicles without padded dash panel ⇒ page 166 .
6 - Radio - R-
❑ “R 110”
❑ Fitting location: in centre console

34 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 35
❑ Anti-theft coding ⇒ page 39 .
❑ Adapting components ⇒ page 41
❑ Connector pin assignment ⇒ page 37 .
7 - Aerial - R11-
❑ Aerial in windscreen.
❑ Not installed the “Caravelle” version
❑ Additional information: chapter "Aerial systems" ⇒ page 238 .
8 - CD changer - R41-
❑ 6-disc CD changer
❑ Fitting location: under right front seat.
❑ Additional information: chapter "CD changer" ⇒ page 155 .

6.3 Removing and installing radio system “R


110”

Note

♦ The part number for the radio can be found on a sticker on the
radio housing.
♦ Obtain the radio code number from the customer before re‐
moving the radio. If the radio has to be renewed, it is essential
to activate the anti-theft coding ⇒ page 39 . The customer
must be informed of the new code number.

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Radio release tool - T10057-

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

6. Radio system “R 110” 35


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Push radio release tools - T10057- into the intended slots on


left and right of radio -arrows- until they engage audibly.

– Using release tools -arrow-, pull radio out of installation slot


until you can access connectors on rear of radio.

– Press together connector locking mechanism in direction of


-arrows-.

– Swivel locking bar up in direction of -arrow- and pull off con‐


nector.

36 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Release and disconnect connector -arrow- from aerial con‐


nection.
– Remove radio completely.

– Press locking tabs -arrow- and pull release tools out forwards.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Connect connectors to radio and engage them.

Caution

Risk of damage to display and operating keys!


When inserting the radio system into the installation slot by
pressing against the display or operating keys, the unit could
become damaged.
When inserting the radio system never press against the dis‐
play or operating keys.

– Slide radio straightly into the dash panel until it locks into place
in the mounting frame.
– Check coding of radio and re-code if necessary ⇒ page 41 .

6.4 Connector pin assignment - radio system “R 110”

6. Radio system “R 110” 37


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Multi-pin connector 1, loud‐


speaker outputs, pin assign‐
ment ⇒ page 38 .
2 - Multi-pin connector 2, CAN
bus and voltage supply, pin as‐
signment ⇒ page 39 .
3 - Multi-pin connector 3, tele‐
phone connection, pin assign‐
ment ⇒ page 39 .
4 - Multi-pin connector 4 for CD
changer, pin assignment
⇒ page 39 .
5 - Aerial connection for radio
reception

Multi-pin connector 1, 8-pin, loudspeaker outputs


1 - Rear right loudspeaker, positive
2 - Front right loudspeaker, positive
3 - Front left loudspeaker, positive
4 - Rear left loudspeaker, positive
5 - Rear right loudspeaker, negative
6 - Front right loudspeaker, negative
7 - Front left loudspeaker, negative
8 - Rear left loudspeaker, negative

38 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector 2, 8-pin, CAN bus and voltage supply


9 - CAN bus, positive
10 - CAN bus, negative
11 - Not assigned
12 - Voltage supply, negative
13 - Not assigned
14 - Not assigned
15 - Terminal 30 voltage supply, positive
16 - Voltage supply, positive

Multi-pin connector 3, 12-pin for telephone connection


6 - Telephone audio signal, negative
10 - Radio mute switch
12 - Telephone audio signal, positive

Multi-pin connector 4, 12-pin, for CD changer


1 - Not assigned
2 - Not assigned
3 - Voltage supply, negative
4 - Voltage supply, positive
5 - Not assigned
6 - CD changer, DATA OUT (data exchange for CD changer con‐
trol from radio to CD changer)
7 - Not assigned
8 - CD changer, left channel, positive
9 - CD changer, right channel, positive
10 - CD changer, control signal
11 - CD changer, DATA IN (data exchange for CD changer control
from CD changer to radio)
12 - CD changer, CLOCK (internal check protocol for data flow
monitoring)

6.5 Anti-theft coding - radio system “R 110”


The radio system “R 110” is equipped with electronic comfort anti-
theft protection, which is effective in combination with the dash
panel insert.
After disconnecting the radio voltage supply, radio system oper‐
ation is restored when reconnecting the voltage supply without
entering the code number. The prerequisites are that initial acti‐
vation of the anti-theft coding has been performed and the radio
system is reconnected in the same vehicle.

6. Radio system “R 110” 39


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Determining anti-theft code of anti-theft coding via vehicle diag‐


nostic tester:
The anti-theft code can be determined by means of the vehicle
diagnostic tester . The radio card used in the past and the sticker
on the radio have been discontinued.

Note

To determine the anti-theft code, the vehicle diagnostic tester


must be “online” (network connection), and the user must be au‐
thorised to use the program to retrieve radio codes.

Determining anti-theft code of anti-theft coding via vehicle diag‐


nostic tester:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio or radio navigation system
♦ Functions
♦ Radio code request
A system authorisation check is performed and then dealership
data, the VIN and the device number of the radio/RNS are auto‐
matically read out.

Note

During installation of a new radio system, or a radio system which


is not adapted to the vehicle, the tester might not be able to read
the device number of the radio or radio/navigation system. In this
case, enter the number manually. It can be found on the sticker
affixed to the unit and is also stamped onto the side of the unit.

The radio code which has been determined is then shown on the
tester's display.
The anti-theft code must be entered in the radio system manually
⇒ page 40 .
Deactivating anti-theft coding:

Note

The code sticker on the unit and the radio code card have been
successively discontinued for radios and radio navigation sys‐
tems 11.06 ►. If a new radio or radio navigation system, in which
no sticker or radio card is enclosed, is installed, the anti-theft code
must be determined using the vehicle diagnostic tester. Deter‐
mine anti-theft code of anti-theft coding via vehicle diagnostic
tester ⇒ page 40 .

40 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

A blocked radio unit can only be returned to normal operation by


entering the correct code number for the anti-theft coding.

Note

♦ The anti-theft code number is stuck on the radio card together


with the unit number ⇒ Operating manual .
♦ The radio card should not be kept in the vehicle for security
reasons. Request code number from customer, if necessary.
♦ If a radio system is renewed, the code number of the replace‐
ment unit must also be used.
♦ The customer must be informed that the code number has
changed.

– Obtain the code number of the unit, using the familiar EDP
systems, if necessary.
– Switch on radio.
First “SAFE” and, after about 3 seconds, the sequence of num‐
bers “1000” appear on the display.
– Enter the code number affixed to the radio card, using station
buttons 1 to 4. One digit of the code is entered with each sta‐
tion button.
– Once the anti-theft code has been entered, press the »right
arrow« button in the lower button row until “LEARN” is dis‐
played.
The radio unit is now enabled and switches to its last operating
state.

Note

If you enter an incorrect anti-theft code, you can immediately


make a new attempt to enter the correct code. If the wrong anti-
theft code is entered two times, the radio is blocked for one hour.
Leave the radio system and ignition switched on and repeat the
process for deactivating the anti-theft coding after one hour. You
always have two attempts to enter the code, then the radio will be
blocked for one hour.

6.6 Adapting components - radio system “R


110”
Adapting radio components:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio system
♦ Radio functions

6. Radio system “R 110” 41


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

42 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

7 Radio system “RCD 200”


⇒ “7.1 General description - radio system RCD 200 ”, page 43
⇒ “7.2 Overview of fitting locations - radio system RCD 200 ”, page
44
⇒ “7.3 Removing and installing radio system RCD 200 ”,
page 45
⇒ “7.4 Connector pin assignment - radio system RCD 200 ”, page
47
⇒ “7.5 Anti-theft coding - radio system RCD 200 ”, page 49
⇒ “7.6 Adapting components - radio system RCD 200 ”,
page 52

7.1 General description - radio system


“RCD 200”
Radio system “RCD 200”

Note

♦ When faced with complaints, it is absolutely necessary to un‐


derstand the function and the operation of the radio.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Owner's manual
♦ The anti-theft coding uses a fixed code, deactivating anti-theft
coding ⇒ page 50 .
♦ In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the ⇒ vehicle
diagnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode ⇒ Current
flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
♦ When the battery is reconnected, check the items of equip‐
ment in the vehicle (radio, clock, convenience electronics etc.)
with reference to the workshop manual and/or operating in‐
structions and adjust them if necessary.

The “RCD 200” radio consists of the radio and the loudspeakers
in the doors and dash panel, optionally also in the passenger
compartment.
The radio has a final output stage with an output power of 4 x 20
watts.
The front and rear loudspeakers are designed as a 2-way system.
The loudspeakers are installed as follows:
♦ One bass loudspeaker in each front door and one treble loud‐
speaker in the A-pillar trim on each side.
♦ One bass loudspeaker and one treble loudspeaker in each
rear door.
♦ On vehicles from 06.07, wide-band loudspeakers are installed
on some vehicles or radio combinations. Therefore, no treble
loudspeakers are fitted in the dash panel and in the rear left
side panel. For further information, see table ⇒ page 163 .
A connection option for a CD changer is available to extend the
functions ⇒ page 47 . If telephones are used, a mute switch and
an input for the telephone LF signal are also implemented.
The CD drive integrated into the radio can play CDs in both “CD-
R” as well as “CD-RW” formats.
CDs with MP3 format audio files can also be played as an option.

7. Radio system “RCD 200” 43


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Note

♦ Music CDs with 8 cm diameter (mini discs) cannot be played.


♦ Mixed-mode CDs (CDs having both computer data and music)
cannot be played.

The radio system includes the windscreen aerial with aerial am‐
plifier.
The radio system in the “Caravelle” version of the Transporter is
equipped with a side-window aerial with an amplifier in the rear
right window.
Fault detection and fault display:
The radio system is equipped with self-diagnosis.
In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the vehicle di‐
agnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode.

7.2 Overview of fitting locations - radio system “RCD 200”

1 - Aerial amplifier radio - R45-


❑ Installed above right
rear side window.
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
2 - Front loudspeaker systems
in dash panel
❑ On vehicles as of 06.07,
different loudspeaker
combinations are instal‐
led, which may possibly
differ from the ones de‐
scribed here. Additional
information:
⇒ page 163 .
❑ Installed in dash panel
on left and right.
❑ Front left treble loud‐
speaker - R20- and front
right treble loudspeaker
- R22-
❑ Front left mid-range
loudspeaker - R103-
and front right mid-
range loudspeaker -
R104-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling, vehicles with pad‐
ded dash panel
⇒ page 164 .
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling, vehicles without
padded dash panel
⇒ page 166 .
3 - Radio - R-
❑ “RCD 200”
❑ Fitting location: in centre console

44 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 26
❑ Anti-theft coding ⇒ page 49 .
❑ Adapting components ⇒ page 52
❑ Connector pin assignment ⇒ page 47 .
4 - Front left bass loudspeaker - R21- and front right bass loudspeaker - R23-
❑ On vehicles as of 06.07, different loudspeaker combinations are installed, which may possibly differ from
the ones described here. Additional information: ⇒ page 163 .
❑ Installed in lower section of the front doors.
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 168
5 - CD changer - R41-
❑ 6-disc CD changer
❑ Fitting location: under right front seat.
❑ Additional information: chapter "CD changer" ⇒ page 155 .
6 - Rear loudspeaker systems
❑ On vehicles as of 06.07, different loudspeaker combinations are installed, which may possibly differ from
the ones described here. Additional information: ⇒ page 163 .
❑ Installed in rear side panel trims.
❑ Removing and installing rear left bass loudspeaker - R15- and rear right bass loudspeaker - R17-
⇒ page 170
❑ Removing and installing rear left mid-range loudspeaker - R105- and rear right mid-range loudspeaker
- R106- ⇒ page 167
❑ Removing and installing rear left treble loudspeaker - R14- and rear right treble loudspeaker - R16-
⇒ page 167
7 - Aerial - R11-
❑ In the Caravelle as aerial in rear right side window.
❑ All other models with windscreen aerial
❑ Additional information: chapter "Aerial systems" ⇒ page 238 .

7.3 Removing and installing radio system


“RCD 200”

Note

♦ The part number for the radio can be found on a sticker on the
radio housing.
♦ If the radio is renewed, it is essential to activate the anti-theft
coding ⇒ Operating manual . The new code number should
be given to the customer.
♦ If the anti-theft code is unknown, it can be requested from fa‐
miliar systems intended for this purpose. The identification
number of the radio is required to make the request. It is lo‐
cated on a sticker on the side of the radio. The identification
number is also stamped into the material on the side of the
radio.

Special tools and workshop equipment required

7. Radio system “RCD 200” 45


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

♦ Radio release tool - T10057-

Removing:
– Remove any CDs left in the unit ⇒ Operating manual .
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Insert the radio release tools - T10057- into the slots in the
radio -arrows- until they engage.
Top L - top and bottom on left
Top R - top and bottom on right

– Using release tool, pull radio in -direction of arrow- out of in‐


stallation slot until connectors on rear of radio become acces‐
sible.

– Press together connector locking mechanism in direction of


-arrows-.

46 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Swivel locking bar up in -direction of arrow- and pull off con‐


nector.

– Release and disconnect connector -arrow- on aerial connec‐


tion.
– Remove radio completely.

– Press locking tabs -arrow- and pull release tools forwards out
of radio.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Connect connectors to radio and engage them.

Caution

Risk of damage to display and operating keys!


When inserting the radio system into the installation slot by
pressing against the display or operating keys, the unit could
become damaged.
When inserting the radio system never press against the dis‐
play or operating keys.

– Slide radio straightly into the dash panel until it locks into place
in the mounting frame.
– If necessary, deactivate anti-theft coding ⇒ page 49 .
– Check coding of radio and re-code if necessary ⇒ page 52 .

7.4 Connector pin assignment - radio system “RCD 200”

7. Radio system “RCD 200” 47


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Multi-pin connector 1, 8-pin,


loudspeaker outputs
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 48
2 - Multi-pin connector 2, 8-pin,
voltage supply, CAN bus, mute
switch
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 49
3 - Multi-pin connector 3, 12-
pin, telephone signal input
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 49
4 - Multi-pin connector 4, 12-
pin, CD changer control and
CD audio input signals
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 49
5 - Connector 5, aerial connec‐
tion
❑ Connection for aerial
wire

Multi-pin connector 1, 8-pin, loudspeaker outputs


1 - Rear right loudspeaker, positive
2 - Front right loudspeaker, positive
3 - Front left loudspeaker, positive
4 - Rear left loudspeaker, positive
5 - Rear right loudspeaker, negative
6 - Front right loudspeaker, negative
7 - Front left loudspeaker, negative
8 - Rear left loudspeaker, negative

48 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector 2, 8-pin, voltage supply, CAN bus, mute


switch
9 - CAN bus, High
10 - CAN bus, Low
11 - Mute
12 - Negative connection, terminal 31
13 - Not assigned
14 - Not assigned
15 - Positive connection, terminal 30
16 - Control signal for anti-theft coding, SAFE

Multi-pin connector 3, 12-pin, telephone signal input


1–5 - Not assigned
6 - Telephone low-frequency audio signal input, negative
7–11 - Not assigned
12 - Telephone low-frequency audio signal input, positive

Multi-pin connector 4, 12-pin, CD changer control and CD audio


input signals
1 - Not assigned
2 - CD changer, left and right channels, negative
3 - Not assigned
4 - CD changer, voltage supply, positive
5 - Not assigned
6 - CD changer, DATA OUT (data exchange for CD changer con‐
trol from radio navigation system to CD changer)
7 - Not assigned
8 - CD changer, left channel audio output, positive
9 - CD changer, right channel audio output, positive
10 - CD changer, control signal
11 - CD changer, DATA IN (data exchange for CD changer control
from CD changer to radio navigation system)
12 - CD changer, CLOCK (internal check protocol for data flow
monitoring)

7.5 Anti-theft coding - radio system “RCD


200”
The radio is equipped with electronic comfort anti-theft protection,
which is effective in combination with the dash panel insert.
After disconnecting the radio voltage supply, radio operation is
restored when reconnecting the voltage supply without entering
the code number. The prerequisites are that initial activation of

7. Radio system “RCD 200” 49


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

the anti-theft coding has been performed and the radio is recon‐
nected in the same vehicle.
Functional notes:
After initial activation of the anti-theft coding, an internal numerical
code is saved in the vehicle's radio and in the dash panel insert.
If the radio's voltage is now disconnected when working on the
vehicle (i.e. removing the radio or battery), data exchange be‐
tween radio and dash panel insert occurs when the radio's voltage
is reconnected.
Now the internal numerical code for the radio and the dash panel
insert are compared. If the numerical code is identical, the dash
panel insert recognises that the connected radio belongs to this
vehicle, and the radio is operational immediately without entering
the anti-theft code again.
If the radio is exchanged, the anti-theft code must be entered
again.
Deactivating anti-theft coding ⇒ page 50 .
After switching on the “S contact” via the ignition lock, comparison
between the dash panel insert and radio is then started automat‐
ically.
Comparison takes approx. 5 seconds. No diagnostic unit may be
connected during this period of time.
After disconnecting the voltage supply and subsequent recom‐
missioning, this radio in this vehicle is then operational without
entering the anti-theft code again.
The anti-theft coding is activated and blocks the radio when the
following conditions are met:
♦ The radio is installed in another vehicle.
♦ The dash panel insert is changed.
Blockage of the radio via the anti-theft coding is shown via “SAFE”
and “1000” appearing in the display after switching the unit on.
Deactivate the anti-theft coding to release the unit lock
⇒ page 50 .
Deactivating anti-theft coding:

Note

The code sticker on the unit and the radio code card have been
successively discontinued for radios and radio navigation sys‐
tems 11.06 ►. If a new radio or radio navigation system, in which
no sticker or radio card is enclosed, is installed, the anti-theft code
must be determined using the vehicle diagnostic tester. Deter‐
mine anti-theft code of anti-theft coding via vehicle diagnostic
tester ⇒ page 51 .

A blocked radio unit can only be returned to normal operation by


entering the correct code number for the anti-theft coding.

50 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Note

♦ The anti-theft code number is stuck on the radio card together


with the unit number ⇒ Operating manual .
♦ The radio card should not be kept in the vehicle for security
reasons. Request code number from customer, if necessary.
♦ If a radio is renewed, the code number of the replacement unit
also must be used.
♦ The new code number must be provided to the customer.

– Obtain the code number of the unit.


– Switch on radio.
The unit automatically displays “SAFE” and then “1000”. There is
no need to operate any buttons.
– With the aid of station buttons 1 to 4, enter the code number
from the sticker on the radio card. In this case, button 1 is used
to enter the first digit of the code number, button 2 for the sec‐
ond digit, etc.
– Press the right rotary pushbutton on the radio and hold it for 2
seconds. The unit is then ready to operate again and switches
to its last operating state.

Note

If an incorrect anti-theft code has been entered on deactivating


the electronic lock, “SAFE” first flashes in the display, followed by
“1000” again. The entire process can now be repeated again. The
number of attempts is shown in the display. If an incorrect code
number is entered again, the unit is blocked for approx. 1 hour,
i.e. it cannot be operated. This lock is indicated by “SAFE” and a
small “2” being continuously shown on the left of the display. After
one hour (the device must remain switched on), the displayed
attempts disappear. The electronic lock can then be deactivated
again as described above. The »two attempts, blocked for one
hour« cycle still applies.

Determining anti-theft code of anti-theft coding via vehicle diag‐


nostic tester:
The anti-theft code can be determined by means of the vehicle
diagnostic tester . The radio card used in the past and the sticker
on the radio have been discontinued.

Note

To determine the anti-theft code, the vehicle diagnostic tester


must be “online” (network connection), and the user must be au‐
thorised to use the program to retrieve radio codes.

– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐


eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body

7. Radio system “RCD 200” 51


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio or radio navigation system
♦ Functions
♦ Radio code request
A system authorisation check is performed and then dealership
data, the VIN and the device number of the radio/RNS are auto‐
matically read out.

Note

During installation of new radios, or radios and radio/navigation


systems which are not adapted to the vehicle, the tester might not
be able to read the device number of the radio or the radio/navi‐
gation system. In this case, enter the device number manually. It
can be found on the sticker affixed to the unit and is also stamped
onto the side of the unit.

The radio code which has been determined is then shown on the
tester's display.
The anti-theft code must be entered manually into the radio or
radio navigation system ⇒ page 50 .

7.6 Adapting components - radio system


“RCD 200”
Adapting radio components:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio system
♦ Functions

52 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

8. Radio system “RCD 210” 53


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

8 Radio system “RCD 210”


⇒ “8.1 General description - radio system RCD 210 ”, page 54
⇒ “8.2 Overview of fitting locations - radio system RCD 210 ”, page
55
⇒ “8.3 Removing and installing radio system RCD 210 ”,
page 57
⇒ “8.4 Connector pin assignment - radio system RCD 210 ”, page
59
⇒ “8.5 Anti-theft coding - radio system RCD 210 ”, page 61
⇒ “8.6 Adapting components - radio system RCD 210 ”,
page 63

8.1 General description - radio system


“RCD 210”
Radio system “RCD 210”

Note

♦ When faced with complaints, it is absolutely necessary to un‐


derstand the function and the operation of the radio.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Operating manual
♦ The anti-theft coding uses a fixed code ⇒ page 61 .
♦ In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the ⇒ vehicle
diagnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode ⇒ Current
flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
♦ When the battery is reconnected, check the items of equip‐
ment in the vehicle (radio, clock, convenience electronics etc.)
with reference to the workshop manual and/or operating in‐
structions and adjust them if necessary.

Radio “RCD 210” consists of the radio and the loudspeakers in


the dash panel and in the doors.
The radio unit has a final stage power output of 2 x 20 watts.
The radio is also available with a final stage power output of
4 x 20 watts as an option.
A connection option for a CD changer is available to extend the
functions.
The CD drive integrated into the radio can play the following CD
formats:
♦ CD-R
♦ CD-RW
♦ MP3

Note

♦ Music CDs with 8 cm diameter (mini discs) cannot be played.


♦ No mix CDs can be played.

The aerial is integrated into the left exterior mirror and does not
include a “diversity function”.

54 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Radio “RCD 210” has following features:


♦ Display: monochrome
♦ FM simple tuner
♦ CD drive
♦ UTP low (mono input)
♦ MP3
♦ RDS
♦ 2 or 4 x 20 watt output power
♦ AUX-IN connection
♦ External CD changer connection without MP3
♦ Support for multifunction steering wheel
♦ Speed-dependent volume control (GALA)
♦ Self-diagnosis, including loudspeaker diagnosis
♦ CAN, TP 2.0
♦ Convenience coding
Fault detection and fault display:
The radio system is equipped with self-diagnosis.
In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the vehicle di‐
agnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode.

8.2 Overview of fitting locations - radio system “RCD 210”

8. Radio system “RCD 210” 55


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Amplifier - R12-
❑ Installation is optional.
❑ Fitting location: under
right front seat.
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Sound system
amplifier" ⇒ page 173 .
2 - Radio - R-
❑ “RCD 210”
❑ Installed in centre of
dash panel.
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 57
❑ Anti-theft coding
⇒ page 61 .
❑ Adapting components
⇒ page 63
❑ Connector pin assign‐
ment ⇒ page 59 .
3 - Multifunction buttons on left
in steering wheel - E440- and
multifunction buttons on right
in steering wheel - E441-
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Multifunction
steering wheel"
⇒ page 285 .
4 - Rear right bass loudspeak‐
er - R17- , rear left bass loud‐
speaker - R15- , rear right
treble loudspeaker - R16- and
rear left treble loudspeaker -
R14-
❑ Installation is optional.
❑ Installed in left and right side panel trims in passenger compartment.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Sound system" ⇒ page 162 .
5 - Front right bass loudspeaker - R23- and front left bass loudspeaker - R21-
❑ Installed in left and right doors.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Sound system" ⇒ page 162 .
6 - Driver side exterior mirror - VX4- with aerial system
❑ Installed in left exterior mirror.
❑ The aerial version is technically adapted to the vehicle's equipment.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Aerial systems" ⇒ page 238 .
7 - Front right treble loudspeaker - R22- and front left treble loudspeaker - R20-
❑ Installed in dash panel on left and right.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Sound system" ⇒ page 162 .
8 - Connection for external audio source - R199- and USB connection retainer - R193-
❑ Additional information: chapter "Multimedia control unit" ⇒ page 151 .
❑ Both connection sockets are installed in glove compartment.

56 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

8.3 Removing and installing radio system


“RCD 210”
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Removal wedge - 3409-

Removing:
– Remove any CDs left in the unit ⇒ Operating manual .
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Unclip storage compartment -1- above radio.

– Unscrew the 2 securing bolts -1-.


– First carefully unclip cover -2- at top and then at bottom using
removal wedge - 3409- .
– Remove cover -2-.

8. Radio system “RCD 210” 57


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Unscrew the 4 securing bolts -arrows- from radio system.


– Pull radio system out of installation slot until connectors at rear
are accessible.

Connectors at rear of unit:


1- Multi-pin connector
2- This aerial connector is not available on this unit
3- Aerial connector 1 for radio reception
4- This aerial connector is not available on this unit

Note

The number and the fitting locations of connectors on the unit can
vary according to the different radios or radio/navigation systems.

– Press locking mechanism of connector together in


-direction of arrow-.

– Swivel locking bar up in -direction of arrow- and pull out con‐


nector.

58 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Unlock and disconnect connectors -arrows- from aerial con‐


nections.

Note

The number of connectors on the unit can vary according to the


different radio or radio navigation systems.

Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Connect connectors to radio and engage them.

Caution

Risk of damage to display and operating keys!


When inserting the radio system into the installation slot by
pressing against the display or operating keys, the unit could
become damaged.
When inserting the radio system never press against the dis‐
play or operating keys.

– Slide radio system straight into dash panel.

– Screw in and tighten the 4 securing bolts -arrows-.


– If necessary, deactivate anti-theft coding ⇒ page 61 .
– Check coding of radio and re-code if necessary ⇒ page 63 .

8.4 Connector pin assignment - radio system “RCD 210”

8. Radio system “RCD 210” 59


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Multi-pin connector 1, 8-pin,


loudspeaker outputs
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 60
2 - Multi-pin connector 2, 8-pin,
voltage supply, CAN bus
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 61
3 - Multi-pin connector 3, 12-
pin, telephone signal input,
mute switch
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 61
4 - Multi-pin connector 4, 12-
pin, connection for external au‐
dio sources, CD changer con‐
trol and CD audio input signals
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 61
5 - Connector 5, aerial connec‐
tion
❑ Connector colour beige
❑ Connection for aerial
cable to aerial

Multi-pin connector 1, 8-pin, loudspeaker outputs


1 - Rear right loudspeaker, positive
2 - Front right loudspeaker, positive
3 - Front left loudspeaker, positive
4 - Rear left loudspeaker, positive
5 - Rear right loudspeaker, negative
6 - Front right loudspeaker, negative
7 - Front left loudspeaker, negative
8 - Rear left loudspeaker, negative

60 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector 2, 8-pin, voltage supply, CAN bus


9 - High-speed CAN bus
10 - Low-speed CAN bus
11 - Not assigned
12 - Negative connection, terminal 31
13 - Not assigned
14 - Not assigned
15 - Positive connection, terminal 30
16 - Control signal for anti-theft coding, SAFE

Multi-pin connector 3, 12-pin, telephone signal input, mute switch


1-5 - Not assigned
6 - Telephone LF signal input, negative
7-9 - Not assigned
10 - Telephone mute switch
11 - Not assigned
12 - Telephone LF signal input, positive

Multi-pin connector 4, 12-pin, connection for external audio sour‐


ces, CD changer control and CD audio input signal
1 - Left connection for external audio sources, positive
2 - Connection for external audio sources, negative
3 - CD changer audio, negative
4 - CD changer, voltage supply, positive
5 - Not assigned
6 - CD changer, bus DATA OUT
7 - Right connection for external audio sources, positive
8 - CD changer, left channel audio, positive
9 - CD changer, right channel audio, positive
10 - CD changer, control signal
11 - CD changer, bus DATA IN
12 - CD changer, bus CLOCK

8.5 Anti-theft coding - radio system “RCD


210”
The radio is equipped with electronic comfort anti-theft protection,
which is effective in combination with the dash panel insert.
After disconnecting the radio voltage supply, radio operation is
restored on reconnecting the voltage supply without entering the
anti-theft code again. The prerequisites are that initial activation
of the anti-theft coding has been performed and the radio is re‐
connected in the same vehicle.

8. Radio system “RCD 210” 61


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Determining anti-theft code of anti-theft coding via vehicle diag‐


nostic tester:
The anti-theft code can be determined by means of the vehicle
diagnostic tester . The radio card used in the past and the sticker
on the radio have been discontinued.

Note

To determine the anti-theft code, the vehicle diagnostic tester


must be “online”. The user must have valid authorisation for the
programme to request radio codes.

– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐


eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio or radio navigation system
♦ Functions
♦ Radio code request
Your system rights are then determined. The operating data, the
VIN and the unit number of the radio or radio/navigation system
are then read out automatically.

Note

During installation of new radios or radio/navigation systems, the


tester might not be able to read the device number of the radio or
the radio/navigation system. In this case, enter the number man‐
ually. It can be found on the sticker affixed to the unit and is also
stamped onto the side of the unit.

The radio code which has been determined is then shown on the
tester's display.
The anti-theft code must be entered manually into the radio or
radio navigation system ⇒ page 62 .
Deactivating anti-theft coding:
– Switch on radio.
The unit automatically displays “SAFE” for about 10 seconds and
then “1000” permanently. There is no need to operate any but‐
tons.
The position of the code number to be set is shown via an “_X _”
on the display, above the multifunction buttons.
– Using the four multifunction buttons which are shown, enter
the previously determined code number in the correct se‐
quence. Press the relevant button as many times as neces‐
sary until the correct number is shown in the centre of the
display.

62 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Then press the multifunction button beneath the word “OK”.


The unit is then ready to operate again and switches to its last
operating state.

Note

If an incorrect anti-theft code has been entered on deactivating


the electronic lock, “SAFE” first flashes in the display, followed by
“1000” again. The entire process can now be repeated again. The
number of attempts is shown in the display. If an incorrect code
number is entered again, the unit is blocked for approx. 1 hour,
i.e. it cannot be operated. This lock is indicated by the fact that
“SAFE” is permanently shown in the display. The display of the
number of attempts is cleared after one hour, during which the
unit and the ignition must be switched on. The electronic lock can
be deactivated again as described above. The »two attempts,
blocked for one hour« cycle still applies.

8.6 Adapting components - radio system


“RCD 210”
Adapting radio components:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio system
♦ Functions

8. Radio system “RCD 210” 63


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

9 Radio system “RCD 310”


⇒ “9.1 General description - radio system RCD 310 ”, page 64
⇒ “9.2 Overview of fitting locations - radio system RCD 310 ”, page
66
⇒ “9.3 Removing and installing radio system RCD 310 ”,
page 67
⇒ “9.4 Connector pin assignment - radio system RCD 310 ”, page
70
⇒ “9.5 Anti-theft coding - radio system RCD 310 ”, page 73
⇒ “9.6 Adapting components - radio system RCD 310 ”,
page 74

9.1 General description - radio system


“RCD 310”
There are two versions of the radio system “RCD 310” in the
Transporter from 2010 onwards:
Radio system “RCD 310” in Multivan vehicles with convenience
dash panel.
Here, the radio is held in with clips. Pulling-out tools must be used
to remove it.

64 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Radio system “RCD 310” in all other vehicle types


Here, the radio is held in with screws. It is removed by undoing
the screws.

Note

♦ When faced with complaints, it is absolutely necessary to un‐


derstand the function and the operation of the radio.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Operating manual
♦ The anti-theft coding uses a fixed code ⇒ page 73 .
♦ In the event of repair work or for fault finding: ⇒ vehicle diag‐
nostic tester , Guided Fault Finding, ⇒ Current flow diagrams,
Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations
♦ When the battery is reconnected, check the items of equip‐
ment in the vehicle (radio, clock, convenience electronics etc.)
with reference to the workshop manual and/or operating in‐
structions and adjust them if necessary.

Radio “RCD 310” consists of the radio and the loudspeakers in


the dash panel and in the doors.
The CD drive integrated into the radio can play the following CD
formats:
♦ CD-R
♦ CD-RW
♦ MP3
♦ WMA

Note

No mix CDs can be played.

The aerial is integrated into the exterior mirrors. The aerial system
includes a “diversity function” integrated in the radio.
Radio “RCD 310” has following features:
♦ Display: monochrome
♦ Diversity function (2 tuners)
♦ CD drive
♦ UTP low (stereo input)
♦ MP3/WMA
♦ Multimedia socket
♦ OPS (optional parking system)
♦ Air conditioning system information via radio display
♦ Externally controllable amplifier
♦ RDS
♦ 2 or 4 x 20 watt output power
♦ AUX-IN connection
♦ External CD changer connection without MP3
♦ Support for multifunction steering wheel

9. Radio system “RCD 310” 65


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

♦ Support for multifunction display (MFD)


♦ Speed-dependent volume control (GALA)
♦ Self-diagnosis, including loudspeaker diagnosis
♦ CAN, TP 2.0, BAP
♦ Convenience coding
Fault detection and fault display:
The radio system is equipped with self-diagnosis.
In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the vehicle di‐
agnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode.

9.2 Overview of fitting locations - radio system “RCD 310”

1 - Front passenger side exte‐


rior mirror - VX5- with aerial
system
❑ Installed in right exterior
mirror.
❑ Diversity aerial system
❑ The aerial version is
technically adapted to
the vehicle's equipment.
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
2 - Amplifier - R12-
❑ Installation is optional.
❑ Fitting location: under
right front seat.
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Sound system
amplifier" ⇒ page 173 .
3 - Radio - R-
❑ “RCD 310”
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 67
❑ Anti-theft coding
⇒ page 73 .
❑ Adapting components
⇒ page 74
❑ Connector pin assign‐
ment ⇒ page 70 .
4 - Multifunction buttons on left
in steering wheel - E440- and
multifunction buttons on right
in steering wheel - E441-
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Multifunction steering wheel" ⇒ page 285 .
5 - Rear right bass loudspeaker - R17- , rear left bass loudspeaker - R15- , rear right treble loudspeaker - R16-
and rear left treble loudspeaker - R14-
❑ Installation is optional.
❑ Installed in left and right side panel trims in passenger compartment.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Sound system" ⇒ page 162 .

66 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

6 - Front right bass loudspeaker - R23- and front left bass loudspeaker - R21-
❑ Installed in left and right doors.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Sound system" ⇒ page 162 .
7 - Driver side exterior mirror - VX4- with aerial system
❑ Installed in left exterior mirror.
❑ Diversity aerial system
❑ The aerial version is technically adapted to the vehicle's equipment.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Aerial systems" ⇒ page 238 .
8 - Multimedia system control unit - J650-
❑ Installed in area of anti-vibration brace beneath dash panel insert.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Multimedia system control unit" ⇒ page 151 .
9 - Front right treble loudspeaker - R22- and front left treble loudspeaker - R20-
❑ Installed in dash panel on left and right.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Sound system" ⇒ page 162 .
10 - Connection for external audio source - R199- and USB connection retainer - R193-
❑ Additional information: chapter "Multimedia control unit" ⇒ page 151 .
❑ Installed in glove compartment.

9.3 Removing and installing radio system


“RCD 310”
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Removal wedge - 3409-

♦ Radio release tool - T10057- (only for Multivan vehicles with


convenience dash panel)

Removing:
– Remove any CDs left in the unit ⇒ Operating manual .
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

9. Radio system “RCD 310” 67


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Only Multivan vehicles with convenience dash panel:


– Slide radio release tools -T10057- into release slots -arrows-
until they engage.
Top L - top and bottom on left
Top R - top and bottom on right

– Using the grip rings of the release tools, pull radio out of dash
panel -arrow- until connectors at rear are accessible.
All other vehicles:

– Unclip storage compartment -1- above radio.

– Unscrew the 2 securing bolts -1-.


– First carefully unclip cover -2- at top and then at bottom using
removal wedge - 3409- .
– Remove cover -2-.

68 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Unscrew the 4 securing bolts -arrows- from radio system.


– Pull radio system out of installation slot until connectors at rear
are accessible.
Continuation for all vehicles:

Connectors at rear of unit:


1- Multi-pin connector
2- This aerial connector is not available on this unit
3- Aerial connector 1 for radio reception
4- This aerial connector is not available on this unit

Note

The number and the fitting locations of connectors on the unit can
vary according to the different radios or radio/navigation systems.

– Press locking mechanism of connector together in


-direction of arrow-.

– Swivel locking bar up in -direction of arrow- and pull out con‐


nector.

9. Radio system “RCD 310” 69


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Unlock and disconnect connectors -arrows- from aerial con‐


nections.

Note

The number of connectors on the unit can vary according to the


different radio or radio navigation systems.

Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Connect connectors to radio and engage them.

Caution

Risk of damage to display and operating keys!


When inserting the radio system into the installation slot by
pressing against the display or operating keys, the unit could
become damaged.
When inserting the radio system never press against the dis‐
play or operating keys.

– Slide radio system straight into dash panel.


Only for radios with bolted connection:

– Screw in and tighten the 4 securing bolts -arrows-.


– Install centre console cover.
– If necessary, deactivate anti-theft coding ⇒ page 73 .
– Check coding of radio and re-code if necessary ⇒ page 74 .

9.4 Connector pin assignment - radio system “RCD 310”

70 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Aerial connection
❑ DAB aerial connection
input, optional.
2 - Multi-pin connector 1, 8-pin,
loudspeaker outputs
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 71
3 - Multi-pin connector 2, 8-pin,
voltage supply, CAN bus, mute
switch
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 72
4 - Multi-pin connector 3, 12-
pin, AUX audio output, tele‐
phone signal input
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 72
5 - Multi-pin connector 4, 12-
pin, connection for external au‐
dio sources, CD changer con‐
trol and CD audio input signals
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 72
6 - Aerial connection
❑ AM/FM aerial connec‐
tion input.
7 - Aerial connection
❑ AM/FM aerial connec‐
tion input.

Multi-pin connector 1, 8-pin, loudspeaker outputs


1 - Rear right loudspeaker, positive
2 - Front right loudspeaker, positive
3 - Front left loudspeaker, positive
4 - Rear left loudspeaker, positive
5 - Rear right loudspeaker, negative
6 - Front right loudspeaker, negative
7 - Front left loudspeaker, negative
8 - Rear left loudspeaker, negative

9. Radio system “RCD 310” 71


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector 2, 8-pin, voltage supply, CAN bus, mute


switch
9 - High-speed CAN bus
10 - Low-speed CAN bus
11 - Voltage supply display, switched on, positive
12 - Negative connection, terminal 31
13 - CAN bus display, negative
14 - CAN bus display, positive
15 - Positive connection, terminal 30
16 - Control signal for anti-theft coding, SAFE

Multi-pin connector 3, 12-pin, AUX audio output, telephone signal


input
1 - Microphone input, negative
2 - AUX output, audio, positive, right
3 - AUX output, audio, negative
4 - Microphone output, negative
5 - Telephone LF signal input, left, negative
6 - Telephone LF signal input, right, negative
7 - Microphone input, positive
8 - AUX output, audio, positive, left
9 - Microphone output, positive
10 - Mute
11 - Telephone LF signal input, left, positive
12 - Telephone LF signal input, right, positive

Multi-pin connector 4, 12-pin, connection for external audio sour‐


ces, CD changer control and CD audio input signals
1 - Left connection for external audio sources, positive
2 - Connection for external audio sources, negative
3 - CD changer audio, negative
4 - CD changer, voltage supply, positive
5 - Not assigned
6 - CD changer, bus data OUT
7 - Right connection for external audio sources, positive
8 - CD changer, left channel audio, positive
9 - CD changer, right channel audio, positive
10 - CD changer, control signal
11 - CD changer, bus data IN
12 - CD changer, bus clock

72 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

9.5 Anti-theft coding - radio system “RCD


310”
The radio is equipped with electronic comfort anti-theft protection,
which is effective in combination with the dash panel insert.
After disconnecting the radio voltage supply, radio operation is
restored on reconnecting the voltage supply without entering the
anti-theft code again. The prerequisites are that initial activation
of the anti-theft coding has been performed and the radio is re‐
connected in the same vehicle.
Determining anti-theft code of anti-theft coding via vehicle diag‐
nostic tester:
The anti-theft code can be determined by means of the vehicle
diagnostic tester . The radio card used in the past and the sticker
on the radio have been discontinued.

Note

To determine the anti-theft code, the vehicle diagnostic tester


must be “online”. The user must have valid authorisation for the
programme to request radio codes.

– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐


eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio or radio navigation system
♦ Functions
♦ Radio code request
Your system rights are then determined. The operating data, the
VIN and the unit number of the radio or radio/navigation system
are then read out automatically.

Note

During installation of new radios or radio/navigation systems, the


tester might not be able to read the device number of the radio or
the radio/navigation system. In this case, enter the number man‐
ually. It can be found on the sticker affixed to the unit and is also
stamped onto the side of the unit.

The radio code which has been determined is then shown on the
tester's display.
The anti-theft code must be entered manually into the radio or
radio navigation system ⇒ page 73 .
Deactivating anti-theft coding:
– Switch on radio.

9. Radio system “RCD 310” 73


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

The word “SAFE” appears for approx. 10 seconds on the display


and then number sequence “1000”.
– Enter code numbers by pressing relevant function buttons re‐
peatedly until correct sequence of digits is displayed.
After entering the four-digit code number, “OK” appears on the
display.
– When you have entered the correct code number, confirm it
with the “OK” function button on the display.
The unit will be released and is ready for use.

Note

If you enter an incorrect anti-theft code, you can immediately


make a new attempt to enter the correct code. If the wrong anti-
theft code is entered two times, the radio is blocked for one hour.
Leave radio and ignition switched on. The process of deactivating
the anti-theft coding can then be repeated after one hour. You
always have two attempts to enter the code, then the radio will be
blocked for one hour.

9.6 Adapting components - radio system


“RCD 310”
Adapting radio components:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio or radio navigation system
♦ Functions

74 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

10. Radio navigation system (RNS) with monochrome display 75


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

10 Radio navigation system (RNS) with


monochrome display
⇒ “10.1 General description - radio navigation system with mon‐
ochrome display”, page 76
⇒ “10.2 Fitting location overview - radio navigation system with
monochrome display”, page 77
⇒ “10.3 Removing and installing radio navigation system with
monochrome display”, page 79
⇒ “10.4 Connector pin assignment - radio navigation system with
monochrome display”, page 81
⇒ “10.5 Anti-theft coding - radio navigation system with mono‐
chrome display”, page 83
⇒ “10.6 Adapting components - radio navigation system with
monochrome display”, page 85

10.1 General description - radio navigation


system with monochrome display
Radio navigation system (RNS) with monochrome display

Note

♦ When faced with complaints, it is absolutely necessary to


know the functions and the operation of the radio navigation
system.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Operating manual ⇒ Self-study pro‐
gramme No. 199 ; Radio navigation system
♦ The anti-theft coding uses a fixed code ⇒ page 83 .
♦ When retrofitting, repairing or fault finding ⇒ Self-diagnosis
⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting lo‐
cations
♦ If the navigation system is inaccurate, adapt the tyre circum‐
ference (Adapting components, navigation system
⇒ page 85 ).
♦ When the battery is reconnected, check the items of equip‐
ment in the vehicle (radio, clock, convenience electronics etc.)
with reference to the workshop manual and/or operating in‐
structions and adjust them if necessary.
♦ The use of magnetic-base roof aerials may lead to permanent
magnetisation of the bodywork panels, resulting in malfunction
of the navigation system. If a customer complains about im‐
precise or erroneous indication of direction when using the
navigation system, ask the customer if a magnetic-base aerial
has been used before beginning repairs.

The radio navigation system is made up of the operating unit,


loudspeakers and the aerial system.
The loudspeaker system at the front is made up of two 3-way
systems both equipped with a bass loudspeaker in both of the
front doors as well as a mid-range and treble speaker in the left
and right-hand side of the dash panel.
As an option, the radio navigation system can also be equipped
with 4 loudspeakers. Loudspeakers are also fitted in the rear of
the vehicle interior if this option is selected.

76 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

On vehicles from 06.07, wide-band loudspeakers are installed on


some vehicles or radio combinations. Therefore, no treble loud‐
speakers are fitted in the dash panel and in the rear left side panel.
For further information, see table ⇒ page 163 .
The windscreen aerial is used for radio reception.
The radio system in the “Caravelle” version of the Transporter is
equipped with a side-window aerial with an amplifier in the rear
right window.
The roof aerial is used for navigation.
The radio navigation system combines the functions of a naviga‐
tion system with that of a high-quality RDS radio system.
The following components are installed in the system's double
DIN housing:
♦ An RDS radio receiver
♦ A dot matrix liquid crystal display
♦ A navigation system with GPS satellite receiver
♦ A CD drive for the audio and navigation system
The aerials for radio and navigation operation are connected to
the radio/navigation system via two connectors on the back of the
housing.
The CD drive can read a CD ROM for navigation or a music CD.
Whilst a music CD is playing, only restricted operation of the nav‐
igation system is possible.

Note

Mixed-mode CDs (CDs having both computer data and music)


cannot be played.

Connections are provided to extend the radio functions for a 6


disc magazine CD changer and for a telephone system.
Fault detection and fault display:
The radio navigation system is equipped with self-diagnosis.
In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the vehicle di‐
agnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode.

10.2 Fitting location overview - radio navigation system with monochrome dis‐
play

10. Radio navigation system (RNS) with monochrome display 77


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Aerial amplifier radio - R45-


❑ Installed above right
rear side window.
❑ Installed only in the
“Caravelle” version
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
2 - Aerial - R11-
❑ Installed in rear right
side window.
❑ Installed only in the
“Caravelle” version
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
3 - Telephone, navigation sys‐
tem and auxiliary heater aerial
- R66-
❑ Roof aerial for naviga‐
tion system
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
4 - Rear loudspeaker systems
❑ On vehicles as of 06.07,
different loudspeaker
combinations are instal‐
led, which may possibly
differ from the ones de‐
scribed here. Additional
information:
⇒ page 163 .
❑ Installed in rear side
panel trims.
❑ Removing and installing rear left bass loudspeaker - R15- and rear right bass loudspeaker - R17-
⇒ page 170
❑ Removing and installing rear left mid-range loudspeaker - R105- and rear right mid-range loudspeaker
- R106- ⇒ page 167
❑ Removing and installing rear left treble loudspeaker - R14- and rear right treble loudspeaker - R16-
⇒ page 167
5 - Front left bass loudspeaker - R21- and front right bass loudspeaker - R23-
❑ On vehicles as of 06.07, different loudspeaker combinations are installed, which may possibly differ from
the ones described here. Additional information: table ⇒ page 163 .
❑ Installed in lower section of the front doors.
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 168
6 - Front loudspeaker systems in dash panel
❑ On vehicles as of 06.07, different loudspeaker combinations are installed, which may possibly differ from
the ones described here. Additional information: ⇒ page 163 .
❑ Installed in dash panel on left and right.
❑ Front left treble loudspeaker - R20- and front right treble loudspeaker - R22-
❑ Front left mid-range loudspeaker - R103- and front right mid-range loudspeaker - R104-
❑ Removing and installing, vehicles with padded dash panel ⇒ page 164 .
❑ Removing and installing, vehicles without padded dash panel ⇒ page 166 .
7 - Control unit with display for radio and navigation - J503-
❑ Radio navigation system (RNS) with monochrome display

78 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019
❑ Fitting location: in centre console
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 79
❑ Anti-theft coding ⇒ page 83 .
❑ Adapting components ⇒ page 85
❑ Connector pin assignment ⇒ page 81 .
8 - Aerial - R11-
❑ Aerial in windscreen.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Aerial systems" ⇒ page 238 .
9 - CD changer - R41-
❑ 6-disc CD changer
❑ Fitting location: under right front seat.
❑ Additional information: chapter "CD changer" ⇒ page 155 .

10.3 Removing and installing radio naviga‐


tion system with monochrome display

Note

♦ The part number for the complete radio/navigation system is


printed on a sticker on the radio/navigation system housing!
♦ If a radio navigation system from one vehicle is fitted into an‐
other vehicle, it is essential that the part number of the re‐
placement unit is the same as that of the unit previously
installed. Otherwise faults will occur in navigation because the
steering angle sensor setting in the radio navigation system
will not be compatible with the vehicle.
♦ If the radio navigation system is renewed or exchanged, adapt
the impulses of the ABS speed sensors and the tyre circum‐
ference to quickly improve the accuracy of the radio navigation
system, Adapting navigation system components
⇒ page 85 .

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Radio release tool - T10057- (only for Multivan vehicles with
convenience dash panel)

Note

Obtain code number from the customer before removing the radio
navigation system. If the radio navigation system has to be re‐
newed, it is essential to deactivate the anti-theft coding system
⇒ page 83 . The customer must be informed of the new code.

10. Radio navigation system (RNS) with monochrome display 79


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Removing:
– Remove any CDs left in the unit ⇒ Operating manual .
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Slide the radio release tools - T10057- into the release slots
-arrows- until they engage.
Top L - top and bottom on left
Top R - top and bottom on right

– Using the grip rings of the release tools, pull radio navigation
system out of dash panel until connectors at rear are acces‐
sible.
– Release and discinnect all connectors.

– Press locking tabs -arrow- and pull release tool out forwards.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Connect connectors to radio navigation system and engage
them.

Caution

Risk of damage to display and operating keys!


When inserting the radio navigation system into the installation
slot by pressing against the display or operating keys, the unit
could become damaged.
When inserting the radio navigation system never press
against the display or operating keys.

– Slide radio navigation system straight into dash panel, until it


engages in mounting frame.
– Check coding of radio navigation system and re-code if nec‐
essary. In this case coding is carried out via the radio function
of the radio navigation system, Adapting components - radio
navigation system with monochrome display ⇒ page 85 .

80 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

10.4 Connector pin assignment - radio navigation system with monochrome dis‐
play

1 - Connection for navigation


system aerial
2 - Multi-pin connector l
❑ 20-pin connector for dig‐
ital sound package sys‐
tem and preamplifier
outputs, telephone
voice input and second
display as well as CD
changer control.
❑ Multi-pin connector I, -
T20- , consists of 3 parts
that are marked with dif‐
ferent colours:
❑ Contact assignment,
part 1, yellow
⇒ page 82
❑ Contact assignment,
part 2, green
⇒ page 82
❑ Contact assignment,
part 3, blue
⇒ page 82
3 - Multi-pin connector ll
❑ 8-pin connector form
loudspeaker outputs
❑ Contact assignment
⇒ page 82
4 - Multi-pin connector lll
❑ 8-pin connector for volt‐
age supply, telephone
muting, GALA signal, il‐
lumination, the SAFE
function and the S con‐
tact.
❑ Contact assignment
⇒ page 83
5 - Multi-pin connector lV
❑ 10-pin connector for navigation sensors
❑ Contact assignment ⇒ page 83
6 - Radio aerial connection

10. Radio navigation system (RNS) with monochrome display 81


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector I, part 1, yellow


1- Not assigned
2- Not assigned
3- Line out, negative
4- Front left line out, LF
5- Front right line out, RF
6- Switched positive

Multi-pin connector I, part 2, green


7 - Telephone input signal, positive
8 - Second display, CLOCK (clock frequency specification for data
flow)
9 - Second display, DATA (exchange of data for dash panel insert
with second display)
10 - Second display, ENA (monitoring of data flow and feedback
of successful data transfer)
11 - Remote control
12 - Telephone input signal, negative

Multi-pin connector I, part 3, blue


13 - CD changer, DATA IN (data to radio)
14 - CD changer, DATA OUT (data from radio)
15 - CD changer, CLOCK (internal check protocol for data flow
monitoring)
16 - CD changer, voltage supply, positive, terminal 30
17 - CD changer, control signal
18 - CD changer, left and right channels, negative
19 - CD changer, left channel, CD/L
20 - CD changer, right channel, CD/R

Multi-pin connector II, -T8a- , 8-pin, brown


1- Rear right loudspeaker, positive
2- Rear right loudspeaker, negative
3- Front right loudspeaker, positive
4- Front right loudspeaker, negative
5- Front left loudspeaker, positive
6- Front left loudspeaker, negative
7- Rear left loudspeaker, positive
8- Rear left loudspeaker, negative

82 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector III, -T8- , 8-pin, black


1- GALA (speed-dependent volume adjustment)
2- Telephone operation muting (contact is switched to nega‐
tive)
3- Self-diagnosis/K wire
4- Connection for ignition-key-controlled switching on and off
(S contact)
5- Control signal for anti-theft coding, SAFE
6- Illumination, terminal 58b
7- Battery positive, terminal 30
8- Battery negative, terminal 31

Multi-pin connector IV, -T10- , 10-pin, red


1- CAN bus, negative, for digital sound package
2- Speech, negative, for driving instructions
3- CAN bus low for digital sound package
4- Speech low frequency, positive, for driving instructions
5- CAN bus high for digital sound package
6- Speech low frequency, negative, for driving instructions
7- Not assigned (option for telematics)
8- Ignition, terminal 15
9- Not assigned (option for telematics)
10 - Reverse gear signal

10.5 Anti-theft coding - radio navigation sys‐


tem with monochrome display
The radio/navigation system is equipped with anti-theft coding.
If the anti-theft coding is activated, the red light emitting diode at
the upper right of the front panel flashes when the unit and the
ignition are switched off.
After the radio navigation system is switched on, the light emitting
diode goes out and the system is ready to use.
The anti-theft coding is activated and blocks the system when the
following conditions are met:
♦ the voltage supply (terminal 30) drops below a predetermined
voltage.
♦ the radio fuse is blown.
♦ the battery (terminal 30) is disconnected to perform work on
the vehicle.
When the system has been blocked via the anti-theft coding, this
is indicated by “SAFE” being displayed in the display when the
unit is switched on.
Determining anti-theft code of anti-theft coding via vehicle diag‐
nostic tester:
The anti-theft code can be determined by means of the vehicle
diagnostic tester . The radio card used in the past and the sticker
on the radio have been discontinued.

10. Radio navigation system (RNS) with monochrome display 83


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Note

To determine the anti-theft code, the vehicle diagnostic tester


must be “online” (network connection), and the user must be au‐
thorised to use the program to retrieve radio codes.

– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐


eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio or radio navigation system
♦ Functions
♦ Radio code request
Your system rights are then determined. The operating data, the
VIN and the unit number of the radio or radio/navigation system
are then read out automatically.

Note

During installation of new radios, or radios and radio/navigation


systems which are not adapted to the vehicle, the tester might not
be able to read the device number of the radio or the radio/navi‐
gation system. In this case, enter the number manually. It can be
found on the sticker affixed to the unit and is also stamped onto
the side of the unit.

The radio code which has been determined is then shown on the
tester's display.
The anti-theft code must be entered manually into the radio or
radio navigation system ⇒ page 84 .
Deactivating anti-theft coding:

Note

The code sticker on the unit and the radio code card have been
successively discontinued for radios and radio navigation sys‐
tems as of 11.06. If a new radio or radio navigation system, in
which no sticker or radio card is enclosed, is installed, the anti-
theft code must be determined using the vehicle diagnostic tester.
Determine anti-theft code of anti-theft coding via vehicle diagnos‐
tic tester ⇒ page 83 .

A blocked system can only be restarted by entering the correct


code number for the anti-theft coding.

84 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Note

♦ The anti-theft code number is stuck on the radio card together


with the unit number ⇒ Operating manual .
♦ The radio card should not be kept in the vehicle for security
reasons. Request code number from customer, if necessary.
♦ If a radio is renewed, the code number of the replacement unit
also must be used.
♦ The customer must be informed that the code number has
changed.

– Obtain the code number of the unit, using the familiar EDP
systems, if necessary.
– Switch radio navigation system on.
The word “SAFE” appears in the display. The following note ap‐
pears above this: “Please enter a numerical code” and the num‐
ber series “0000”.
– Enter the code number affixed to the radio card by marking the
numbers from the letters and numbers selection box one after
another and confirming them.

Note

Entering the 1st number overwrites the row of figures “0000”.

– Confirm the entered code by pressing the right rotary push‐


button.
The unit will be released and is ready for use.
If the code number has been entered correctly into the radio, the
light-emitting diode located on the top right of the unit must flash
when the ignition key is removed. If the diode flashes the radio is
ready for operation and the anti-theft coding is active.
If an incorrect code number has been entered inadvertently to
release the electronic lock, “SAFE” appears in display, flashing at
first and then appearing continuously. Now the procedure to re‐
lease the electronic lock can be repeated once more.
If an incorrect code number is entered again, the unit will be
blocked for 60 minutes.
A further attempt to release the electric lock is only possible after
the locking period has elapsed.
During the locking period, the unit must remain switched on and
the ignition key must remain in the ignition lock.
After the blocking period has elapsed the number of attempts in
the display is erased and the electronic lock can be released as
described.

10.6 Adapting components - radio navigation


system with monochrome display
Adapting radio components:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .

10. Radio navigation system (RNS) with monochrome display 85


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then


the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio or radio navigation system
♦ Radio functions
Adapting navigation system components:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio or radio navigation system
♦ Functions navigation

86 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

11. Radio navigation system “RNS-MFD 1” 87


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

11 Radio navigation system “RNS-MFD


1”
⇒ “11.1 General description - radio navigation system RNS-MFD
1 ”, page 88
⇒ “11.2 Fitting location overview - radio navigation system RNS-
MFD 1 ”, page 89
⇒ “11.3 Removing and installing radio navigation system RNS-
MFD 1 ”, page 91
⇒ “11.4 Removing and installing traffic information control unit”,
page 93
⇒ “11.5 Connector pin assignment - radio navigation system
RNS-MFD 1 ”, page 94
⇒ “11.6 Anti-theft coding - radio navigation system RNS-MFD 1 ”,
page 96
⇒ “11.7 Adapting components - radio navigation system RNS-
MFD 1 ”, page 99

11.1 General description - radio navigation


system “RNS-MFD 1”
Radio navigation system RNS-MFD 1

Note

♦ When faced with complaints, it is absolutely necessary to


know the functions and the operation of the radio navigation
system.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Operating manual ⇒ Self-study pro‐
gramme No. 199 ; Radio navigation system
♦ The anti-theft coding uses a fixed code ⇒ page 96 .
♦ When retrofitting, repairing or fault finding ⇒ Self-diagnosis ,
⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting lo‐
cations.
♦ When the battery is reconnected, check the items of equip‐
ment in the vehicle (radio, clock, convenience electronics etc.)
with reference to the workshop manual and/or operating in‐
structions and adjust them if necessary.
♦ The use of magnetic-base roof aerials may lead to permanent
magnetisation of the bodywork panels, resulting in malfunction
of the navigation system. If a customer complains about im‐
precise or erroneous indication of direction when using the
navigation system, ask the customer if a magnetic-base aerial
has been used before beginning repairs.

The radio/navigation system combines the functions of a naviga‐


tion system with those of a high-quality RDS car radio.
The double DIN housing system comprises:
♦ An RDS radio receiver
♦ A 5 inch liquid crystal colour display
♦ A navigation system with gyrocompass and GPS satellite re‐
ceiver
♦ A CD Rom drive for the navigation system

88 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

♦ The RNS system also incorporates a traffic information control


unit that is fitted outside the RNS unit.
♦ A TV input on the back of the housing makes it possible to use
TV functions.
♦ The aerial for radio/navigation is connected to the navigation
system via a connector on the back of the housing.

The aerial used for radio reception is the active windscreen aerial
and the aerial for navigation is the roof aerial.
Connections are provided to extend the radio functions for a 6
disc magazine CD changer and for a telephone system.
The loudspeaker system at the front is made up of two 3-way
systems both equipped with a bass loudspeaker in both of the
front doors as well as a mid-range and treble speaker in the left
and right-hand side of the dash panel.
As an option, the radio navigation system can also be equipped
with 4 loudspeakers. Loudspeakers are also fitted in the rear of
the vehicle interior if this option is selected.
On vehicles from 06.07, wide-band loudspeakers are installed on
some vehicles or radio combinations. Therefore, no treble loud‐
speakers are fitted in the dash panel and in the rear left side panel.
For further information, see table ⇒ page 163 .
The radio navigation system may also be equipped with a sound
system with an additional amplifier and a subwoofer as optional
equipment.
Fault detection and fault display:
The radio navigation system is equipped with self-diagnosis.
In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the vehicle di‐
agnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode.

11.2 Fitting location overview - radio navigation system “RNS-MFD 1”

11. Radio navigation system “RNS-MFD 1” 89


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Aerial amplifier radio - R45-


❑ Installed above right
rear side window.
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
2 - Aerial - R11-
❑ Aerial in rear right side
window.
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
3 - Bass loudspeaker (sub‐
woofer)
❑ Optional extra in con‐
junction with sound am‐
plifier
❑ Installed behind rear left
side panel trim.
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ General body repairs,
interior; Rep. gr. 70 ;
Trims, interior
4 - Rear loudspeaker systems
❑ On vehicles as of 06.07,
different loudspeaker
combinations are instal‐
led, which may possibly
differ from the ones de‐
scribed here. Additional
information:
⇒ page 163 .
❑ Installed in rear side
panel trims.
❑ Removing and installing
rear left bass loudspeaker - R15- and rear right bass loudspeaker - R17- ⇒ page 170
❑ Removing and installing rear left mid-range loudspeaker - R105- and rear right mid-range loudspeaker
- R106- ⇒ page 167
❑ Removing and installing rear left treble loudspeaker - R14- and rear right treble loudspeaker - R16-
⇒ page 167
5 - Front left bass loudspeaker - R21- and front right bass loudspeaker - R23-
❑ On vehicles as of 06.07, different loudspeaker combinations are installed, which may possibly differ from
the ones described here. Additional information: ⇒ page 163 .
❑ Installed in lower section of the front doors.
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 168
6 - Front loudspeaker systems in dash panel
❑ On vehicles as of 06.07, different loudspeaker combinations are installed, which may possibly differ from
the ones described here. Additional information: ⇒ page 163 .
❑ Installed in dash panel on left and right.
❑ Front left treble loudspeaker - R20- and front right treble loudspeaker - R22-
❑ Front left mid-range loudspeaker - R103- and front right mid-range loudspeaker - R104-
❑ Removing and installing, vehicles with padded dash panel ⇒ page 164 .
❑ Removing and installing, vehicles without padded dash panel ⇒ page 166 .
7 - Control unit with display for radio and navigation - J503-
❑ “RNS-MFD 1 with CD drive”
❑ Fitting location: in centre console

90 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 91
❑ Anti-theft coding ⇒ page 96 .
❑ Adapting components ⇒ page 99
❑ Connector pin assignment ⇒ page 94 .
8 - CD changer - R41-
❑ 6-disc CD changer
❑ Fitting location: under right front seat.
❑ Additional information: chapter "CD changer" ⇒ page 155 .
9 - Sound system amplifier - R12-
❑ Installed under right front seat.
❑ Fitted optionally only
❑ Additional information: chapter "Sound system amplifier" ⇒ page 173 .
10 - Telephone, navigation system and auxiliary heater aerial - R66-
❑ Roof aerial for navigation system
❑ Additional information: chapter "Aerial systems" ⇒ page 238 .

11.3 Removing and installing radio naviga‐


tion system “RNS-MFD 1”

Note

♦ The part number for the complete radio/navigation system is


printed on a sticker on the radio/navigation system housing!
♦ If a radio navigation system from one vehicle is fitted into an‐
other vehicle, it is essential that the part number of the re‐
placement unit is the same as that of the unit previously
installed. Otherwise faults will occur in navigation because the
steering angle sensor setting in the radio navigation system
will not be compatible with the vehicle.
♦ If the radio navigation system is renewed or exchanged, the
new unit is coded for the setting “with control unit for traffic
information” in the factory. If a vehicle does not have a control
unit for traffic information then error code “00481” will be stor‐
ed. Therefore, recode the radio navigation system to “without
traffic information control unit” ⇒ Adapting components - nav‐
igation system ⇒ page 99 .
♦ If the radio navigation system is renewed or exchanged, adapt
the impulses of the ABS speed sensors and the tyre circum‐
ference to quickly improve the accuracy of the radio navigation
system, Adapting components - navigation system
⇒ page 99 .

Special tools and workshop equipment required

11. Radio navigation system “RNS-MFD 1” 91


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

♦ Radio release tool - T10057- (only for Multivan vehicles with


convenience dash panel)

Note

♦ Obtain code number from the customer before removing the


radio navigation system. If the radio navigation system has to
be renewed, it is essential to deactivate the anti-theft coding
system ⇒ page 83 . The customer must be informed of the new
code.
♦ If the radio navigation system is equipped with a TV function,
then pull the unit out carefully, ensuring that the RGB connec‐
tion is not damaged. If the RGB connection is damaged, the
wire must be renewed up to the TV tuner. The RGB connection
cannot be repaired.

Removing:
– Remove any CDs left in the unit ⇒ Operating manual .
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Slide the radio release tools - T10057- into the release slots
-arrows- until they engage.
Top L - top and bottom on left
Top R - top and bottom on right

– Using the grip rings of the release tools -arrows-, pull radio
navigation system out of dash panel until connectors at rear
are accessible.
– Release and discinnect all connectors.

92 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Press locking tabs -arrow- and pull release tool out forwards.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Connect connectors to radio navigation system and engage
them.

Caution

Risk of damage to display and operating keys!


When inserting the radio navigation system into the installation
slot by pressing against the display or operating keys, the unit
could become damaged.
When inserting the radio navigation system never press
against the display or operating keys.

– Slide radio navigation system straight into dash panel, until it


engages in mounting frame.
– Check coding of radio navigation system and re-code if nec‐
essary ⇒ page 99 .

11.4 Removing and installing traffic informa‐


tion control unit
On vehicles with Climatronic up to 10.04, the traffic information
control unit - J559- is located on the blower box of the air condi‐
tioning system on the right-hand side of the vehicle. On all other
vehicles, and in general as of 11.04, it is located on the cross-strut
behind the dash panel insert.
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove dash panel ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr.
70 ; Dash panel; Removing and installing dash panel
Vehicles with Climatronic up to 10.04:
– Unscrew securing bolt -arrow- on bracket for traffic information
control unit.
– Remove bracket together with traffic information control unit.
– Release and disconnect connectors for power supply and aer‐
ial wires.
All other vehicles and in general as of 11.04:

11. Radio navigation system “RNS-MFD 1” 93


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Unscrew securing bolts -arrows- on bracket for traffic infor‐


mation control unit.
– Remove traffic information control unit.
– Release and disconnect connectors for power supply and aer‐
ial wires.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

11.5 Connector pin assignment - radio navigation system “RNS-MFD 1”

1 - Aerial connection for navi‐


gation system
2 - 26-pin connector for navi‐
gation sensors
Contact assignment
⇒ page 95

3 - RGB connection (video)


Pin assignment ⇒ page 95

4 - Multi-pin connector I, II, III


Multi-pin connector I, -T20- ,
consists of 3 parts that are
marked with different colours:

Pin assignment multi-pin con‐


nector I, part 1, yellow
⇒ page 95

Pin assignment multi-pin con‐


nector I, part 2, green
⇒ page 95

Pin assignment multi-pin con‐


nector I, part 3, blue
⇒ page 96

Pin assignment multi-pin con‐


nector II, -T8a- , 8-pin, brown
⇒ page 96

Pin assignment multi-pin con‐


nector III, -T8- , 8-pin, black
⇒ page 96

5 - Connection for aerial selec‐


tion (diversity function)
This connection is not as‐
signed.

6 - Radio aerial connection

94 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Pin assignment of 26-pin connector for navigation sensors


4 - Terminal 15 (ignition)
5 - Left speed sensor output
6 - Low frequency driving instructions, positive
13 - CAN bus, High
17 - Reversing light switch
18 - Right speed sensor output
19 - Low frequency driving instructions, negative
20 - Driving instructions, low-frequency shielding
26 - CAN bus LOW

Pin assignment of 11-pin connector for RGB connection


1- Low frequency, negative
2- Low frequency, left
3- Low frequency, right
4- Vertical/horizontal synchronisation
5- Video, negative
6- PAL/NTSC
7- Video, on
8- Blue input
9- Green input
10 - Red input
11 - Earth for screening

Multi-pin connector I, part 1, yellow


1- Rear left line out, LR
2- Rear right line out, RR
3- Line out, negative
4- Front left line out, LF
5- Front right line out, RF
6- Switched positive

Multi-pin connector I, part 2, green


7 - Telephone input signal, telephone, positive
8 - Second display, CLOCK (clock frequency specification for data
flow)
9 - Second display, DATA (exchange of data for dash panel insert
with second display)
10 - Second display, ENA (monitoring of data flow and feedback
of successful data transfer)
11 - Remote control
12 - Telephone input signal, telephone, negative

11. Radio navigation system “RNS-MFD 1” 95


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector I, part 3, blue


13 - CD changer, DATA IN (data to radio)
14 - CD changer, DATA OUT (data from radio)
15 - CD changer, CLOCK (internal check protocol for data flow
monitoring)
16 - CD changer, voltage supply, positive, terminal 30
17 - CD changer, control signal
18 - CD changer, left and right channels, negative
19 - CD changer, left channel, CD/L
20 - CD changer, right channel, CD/R

Multi-pin connector II, -T8a- , 8-pin, brown


1- Rear right loudspeaker, positive
2- Rear right loudspeaker, negative
3- Front right loudspeaker, positive
4- Front right loudspeaker, negative
5- Front left loudspeaker, positive
6- Front left loudspeaker, negative
7- Rear left loudspeaker, positive
8- Rear left loudspeaker, negative

Multi-pin connector III, -T8- , 8-pin, black


1- GALA (speed-dependent volume adjustment)
2- Telephone operation muting (contact is switched to nega‐
tive)
3- Self-diagnosis/K wire
4- Connection for ignition-key-controlled switching on and off
(S contact)
5- Control signal for anti-theft coding, SAFE
6- Illumination (terminal 58b)
7- Battery positive, terminal 30
8- Battery negative, terminal 31

11.6 Anti-theft coding - radio navigation sys‐


tem “RNS-MFD 1”
The radio/navigation system is equipped with anti-theft coding.
If the anti-theft coding is activated, the red light emitting diode at
the upper right of the front panel flashes when the unit and the
ignition are switched off.
After the radio navigation system is switched on, the light emitting
diode goes out and the system is ready to use.
The anti-theft coding is activated and blocks the system when the
following conditions are met:
♦ The voltage supply (terminal 30) drops below a predetermined
value.
♦ The radio fuse is blown.

96 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

♦ The battery (terminal 30) is disconnected to perform work on


the vehicle.
When the system has been blocked via the anti-theft coding, this
is indicated by “SAFE” being displayed in the display when the
unit is switched on.
Determining anti-theft code of anti-theft coding via vehicle diag‐
nostic tester:
The anti-theft code can be determined by means of the vehicle
diagnostic tester . The radio card used in the past and the sticker
on the radio have been discontinued.

Note

To determine the anti-theft code, the vehicle diagnostic tester


must be “online” (network connection), and the user must be au‐
thorised to use the program to retrieve radio codes.

– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐


eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio or radio navigation system
♦ Functions
♦ Radio code request
Your system rights are then determined. The operating data, the
VIN and the unit number of the radio or radio/navigation system
are then read out automatically.

Note

During installation of new radios, or radios and radio/navigation


systems which are not adapted to the vehicle, the tester might not
be able to read the device number of the radio or the radio/navi‐
gation system. In this case, enter the number manually. It can be
found on the sticker affixed to the unit and is also stamped onto
the side of the unit.

The radio code which has been determined is then shown on the
tester's display.
The anti-theft code must be entered manually into the radio or
radio navigation system ⇒ page 98 .

11. Radio navigation system “RNS-MFD 1” 97


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Deactivating anti-theft coding:

Note

The code sticker on the unit and the radio code card have been
successively discontinued for radios and radio navigation sys‐
tems as of 11.06. If a new radio or radio navigation system, in
which no sticker or radio card is enclosed, is installed, the anti-
theft code must be determined using the vehicle diagnostic tester.
Determine anti-theft code of anti-theft coding via vehicle diagnos‐
tic tester ⇒ page 97 .

A blocked system can only be restarted by entering the correct


code number for the anti-theft coding.

Note

♦ The anti-theft code number is stuck on the radio card together


with the unit number ⇒ Operating manual .
♦ The radio card should not be kept in the vehicle for security
reasons. Request the code number from the customer, if nec‐
essary.
♦ If a radio is renewed, the code number of the replacement unit
also must be used.
♦ The customer must be informed that the code number has
changed.

– Obtain the code number for the unit, using the familiar EDP
systems, if necessary.
– Switch radio navigation system on.
The word “SAFE” appears in the display. The following note ap‐
pears above this: “Please enter a numerical code” and the num‐
ber series “0000”.
– Enter the code number affixed to the radio card by marking the
numbers from the letters and numbers selection box one after
another and confirming them.

Note

Entering the 1st number overwrites the row of figures “0000”.

– Confirm the entered code by pressing the right rotary push‐


button.
The unit will be released and is ready for use.
If the code number has been entered correctly into the radio, the
light-emitting diode located on the top right of the unit must flash
when the ignition key is removed. If the diode flashes the radio is
ready for operation and the anti-theft coding is active.
If an incorrect code number has been entered inadvertently to
release the electronic lock, “SAFE” appears in display, flashing at
first and then appearing continuously. Now the procedure to re‐
lease the electronic lock can be repeated once more.
If an incorrect code number is entered again, the unit will be
blocked for 60 minutes.
A further attempt to release the electric lock is only possible after
the locking period has elapsed.

98 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

During the locking period, the unit must remain switched on and
the ignition key must remain in the ignition lock.
After the blocking period has elapsed the number of attempts in
the display is erased and the electronic lock can be released as
described.

11.7 Adapting components - radio navigation


system “RNS-MFD 1”
Adapting radio components:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio or radio navigation system
♦ Radio functions
Adapting navigation system components:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio or radio navigation system
♦ Functions navigation

11. Radio navigation system “RNS-MFD 1” 99


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

100 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

12 Radio navigation systems “RNS 2-


CD” and “RNS 2-DVD”
⇒ “12.1 General description - radio navigation systems RNS 2-
CD and RNS 2-DVD ”, page 101
⇒ “12.2 Fitting location overview - radio navigation systems RNS
2-CD and RNS 2-DVD ”, page 102
⇒ “12.3 Removing and installing radio navigation systems RNS
2-CD and RNS 2-DVD ”, page 104
⇒ “12.4 Connector pin assignment - radio navigation systems
RNS 2-CD and RNS 2-DVD ”, page 106
⇒ “12.5 Anti-theft coding - radio navigation systems RNS 2-CD
and RNS 2-DVD ”, page 110
⇒ “12.6 Adapting components - radio navigation systems RNS 2-
CD and RNS 2-DVD ”, page 112

12.1 General description - radio navigation


systems “RNS 2-CD” and “RNS 2-DVD”
Radio/navigation system “RNS 2-CD” and radio/navigation sys‐
tem “RNS 2-DVD”
There are 2 versions of this unit: with CD drive or with DVD drive.

Note

♦ When faced with complaints, it is absolutely necessary to


know the functions and the operation of the radio navigation
system.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Operating manual ⇒ Self-study pro‐
gramme No. 199 ; Radio navigation system
♦ The anti-theft coding uses a fixed code ⇒ page 110 .
♦ In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the ⇒ vehicle
diagnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode ⇒ Current
flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
♦ Adapt the tyre circumference if the navigation system works
inaccurate.
♦ For perfect operation of the navigation system, the turn angle
sensor in the unit is adjusted according to the installation po‐
sition of the unit in the vehicle. Therefore, always note the part
number when exchanging equipment. Incorrect installation
could lead to a malfunction in the navigation system.
♦ When the battery is reconnected, check the items of equip‐
ment in the vehicle (radio, clock, convenience electronics etc.)
with reference to the workshop manual and/or operating in‐
structions and adjust them if necessary.
♦ The use of magnetic-base roof aerials may lead to permanent
magnetisation of the bodywork panels, resulting in malfunction
of the navigation system. If a customer complains about im‐
precise or erroneous indication of direction when using the
navigation system, ask the customer if a magnetic-base aerial
has been used before beginning repairs.

A version of radio navigation system 2 exists with a CD drive It is


then called “RNS 2-CD”. In the second version, the RNS is equip‐
ped with a DVD drive for navigation and is called “RNS 2-DVD”.

12. Radio navigation systems “RNS 2-CD” and “RNS 2-DVD” 101
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Radio/navigation system “RNS 2-DVD” is identified by the follow‐


ing text on the bottom row of buttons:
♦ Radio/navigation system “RNS 2-DVD” has a button labelled
DEST .

Radio/navigation system “RNS 2-CD” is identified by the following


text on the bottom row of buttons:
♦ Radio/navigation system “RNS 2-CD” has a button with the
text AUX and no button labelled DEST .
Radio/navigation system “RNS 2” combines the functions of a
navigation system with those of a high-quality RDS radio.
The following components are contained in the double DIN hous‐
ing for the radio/navigation system:
♦ An RDS radio receiver
♦ A 6.5 inch liquid crystal colour display
♦ A navigation system with GPS satellite receiver
♦ A CD drive for the audio and navigation system and
♦ The “RNS 2-DVD” radio/navigation system version has a DVD
drive for the audio and navigation systems.
♦ A traffic information control unit is integrated in the unit.
The CD drive can read a CD ROM for navigation or a music CD.
Whilst a music CD is playing, only restricted operation of the nav‐
igation system is possible.
The DVD drive in the “RNS 2-DVD” radio/navigation system ver‐
sion can read a navigation DVD or play an audio CD. Whilst an
audio CD is playing, only restricted operation of the navigation
system is possible.

Note

♦ Music CDs with 8 cm diameter (mini discs) cannot be played.


♦ Mixed-mode CDs (CDs having both computer data and music)
cannot be played.

To extend the functions, there are connections for a CD changer,


a TV tuner, a telephone system and an amplifier.
The radio navigation system may also be equipped with a sound
system with an additional amplifier and a subwoofer as optional
equipment.
The diversity aerial system or windscreen aerial is used.
On vehicles from 06.07, wide-band loudspeakers are installed on
some vehicles or radio combinations. Therefore, no treble loud‐
speakers are fitted in the dash panel and in the rear left side panel.
For further information, see table ⇒ page 163 .
Fault detection and fault display:
The radio navigation systems are equipped with self-diagnosis.
In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the vehicle di‐
agnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode.

12.2 Fitting location overview - radio navigation systems “RNS 2-CD” and “RNS
2-DVD”

102 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Aerial selection control unit


- J515-
❑ Installed above right
rear side window.
❑ Not installed in radio/
navigation system “RNS
2-DVD”.
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
2 - Aerial amplifier radio - R45-
❑ Installed above left and
right rear side windows.
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
3 - Aerial - R11-
❑ Aerial in left and right
rear side windows.
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
4 - Bass loudspeaker (sub‐
woofer)
❑ Optional extra in con‐
junction with sound am‐
plifier
❑ Installed behind rear left
side panel trim.
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ General body repairs,
interior; Rep. gr. 70 ;
Trims, interior
5 - Rear loudspeaker systems
❑ On vehicles as of 06.07, different loudspeaker combinations are installed, which may possibly differ from
the ones described here. Additional information: ⇒ page 163 .
❑ Installed in rear side panel trims.
❑ Removing and installing rear left bass loudspeaker - R15- and rear right bass loudspeaker - R17-
⇒ page 170
❑ Removing and installing rear left mid-range loudspeaker - R105- and rear right mid-range loudspeaker
- R106- ⇒ page 167
❑ Removing and installing rear left treble loudspeaker - R14- and rear right treble loudspeaker - R16-
⇒ page 167
6 - Front left bass loudspeaker - R21- and front right bass loudspeaker - R23-
❑ On vehicles as of 06.07, different loudspeaker combinations are installed, which may possibly differ from
the ones described here. Additional information: ⇒ page 163 .
❑ Installed in lower section of the front doors.
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 168
7 - Front loudspeaker systems in dash panel
❑ On vehicles as of 06.07, different loudspeaker combinations are installed, which may possibly differ from
the ones described here. Additional information: ⇒ page 163 .
❑ Installed in dash panel on left and right.
❑ Front left treble loudspeaker - R20- and front right treble loudspeaker - R22-
❑ Front left mid-range loudspeaker - R103- and front right mid-range loudspeaker - R104-
❑ Removing and installing, vehicles with padded dash panel ⇒ page 164 .
❑ Removing and installing, vehicles without padded dash panel ⇒ page 166 .

12. Radio navigation systems “RNS 2-CD” and “RNS 2-DVD” 103
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

8 - Control unit with display for radio and navigation - J503-


❑ Radio navigation system “RNS 2-CD or RNS 2-DVD”.
❑ Fitting location: in centre console
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 104
❑ Anti-theft coding ⇒ page 110 .
❑ Adapting components ⇒ page 112
❑ Connector pin assignment ⇒ page 106 .
9 - CD changer - R41-
❑ 6-disc CD changer
❑ Fitting location: under right front seat.
❑ Additional information: chapter "CD changer" ⇒ page 155 .
10 - Sound system amplifier - R12-
❑ Installed under right front seat.
❑ Optional equipment
❑ Additional information: chapter "Sound system amplifier" ⇒ page 173 .
11 - Telephone, navigation system and auxiliary heater aerial - R66-
❑ Roof aerial for navigation system
❑ Additional information: chapter "Aerial systems" ⇒ page 238 .

12.3 Removing and installing radio naviga‐


tion systems “RNS 2-CD” and “RNS 2-
DVD”

Note

♦ The part number for the complete radio/navigation system is


printed on a sticker on the radio/navigation system housing!
♦ Before removing the radio navigation system, obtain the radio
code from the customer. If the radio navigation system has to
be renewed, it is essential to activate the anti-theft coding ⇒
Operating manual . The customer must be informed of the new
code number.
♦ If a radio navigation system from one vehicle is fitted into an‐
other, it is vital that the part number of the replacement unit is
the same as that of the unit previously installed. Otherwise
faults will occur with the navigation because the turn angle
sensor setting in the radio navigation system will not be com‐
patible with the vehicle.
♦ If the radio navigation system is renewed or exchanged, adapt
the tyre circumference to quickly improve the accuracy of the
radio navigation system. Adapting components - navigation
system ⇒ page 112 .

Special tools and workshop equipment required

104 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

♦ Radio release tool - T10057- (only for Multivan vehicles with


convenience dash panel)

Removing:
– Remove any CDs left in the unit ⇒ Operating manual .
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Slide the radio release tools - T10057- into the release slots
-arrows- until they engage.
Top L - top and bottom on left
Top R - top and bottom on right

– Using the grip rings of the release tools -arrows-, pull radio
navigation system out of dash panel until connectors at rear
are accessible.

– Press locking mechanism of connector -1- together and pull


up locking bar -2- in -direction of arrow-.
– Release and disconnect all remaining connectors and remove
radio navigation system.

12. Radio navigation systems “RNS 2-CD” and “RNS 2-DVD” 105
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Press locking tabs -arrow- and pull release tool out forwards.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Connect connectors to radio navigation system and engage
them.

Caution

Risk of damage to display and operating keys!


When inserting the radio navigation system into the installation
slot by pressing against the display or operating keys, the unit
could become damaged.
When inserting the radio navigation system never press
against the display or operating keys.

– Slide radio navigation system straight into dash panel, until it


engages in mounting frame.
– Check coding of radio navigation system and re-code if nec‐
essary ⇒ page 112 .

12.4 Connector pin assignment - radio navigation systems “RNS 2-CD” and
“RNS 2-DVD”

106 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Multi-pin connector 1, 18-


pin
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 108
2 - Multi-pin connector 2
❑ Connection for naviga‐
tion system aerial
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 108
3 - Multi-pin connector 3, 8-pin
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 108
4 - Multi-pin connector 4, 8-pin
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 109
5 - Multi-pin connector 5, 12-
pin
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 109
6 - Multi-pin connector 6, 12-
pin
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 109
7 - Connector 7
❑ Aerial connection
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 110
8 - Connector 8
❑ Aerial connection
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 110

12. Radio navigation systems “RNS 2-CD” and “RNS 2-DVD” 107
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector 1, 18-pin, for video and low frequency input


1 - Not assigned
2 - Audio signal, earth
3 - Audio signal, earth
4 - Screening, earth
5 - Video signal, earth
6 - Video switching signal
7 - Video signal, earth
8 - Video signal, earth
9 - Video signal, earth
10 - Not assigned
11 - Audio signal, left
12 - Audio signal, right
13 - Screening, earth
14 - C synchronisation
15 - 50 Hertz/60 Hertz
16 - Blue picture signal input
17 - Green picture signal input
18 - Red picture signal input

Multi-pin connector 2
1 - Violet connection for roof aerial input signal for navigation

Multi-pin connector 3, 8-pin, for loudspeaker outputs


1 - Rear right loudspeaker, positive
2 - Front right loudspeaker, positive
3 - Front left loudspeaker, positive
4 - Rear left loudspeaker, positive
5 - Rear right loudspeaker, negative
6 - Front right loudspeaker, negative
7 - Front left loudspeaker, negative
8 - Rear left loudspeaker, negative

108 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector 4, 8-pin, for voltage supply wires and CAN


bus
9 - CAN bus, High
10 - CAN bus, Low
11 - Radio mute (when telephone is in use)
12 - Terminal 31 voltage supply, negative
13 - Connection for ignition-key-controlled switching on and off (S
contact)
14 - Alarm system contact (optional)
15 - Terminal 30 voltage supply, positive
16 - Control signal for anti-theft coding, SAFE

Multi-pin connector 5, 12-pin, for telephone signals and pre-am‐


plifier output signals
1 - External audio input, left
2 - External audio input, earth
3 - Line out, left
4 - Not assigned
5 - Voice output LF, positive
6 - Telephone audio input signal, negative
7 - External audio input, right
8 - Line out, earth
9 - Line out, right
10 - Not assigned
11 - Voice output LF, negative
12 - Telephone audio input signal, positive

Multi-pin connector 6, 12-pin, for CD changer control and CD au‐


dio input signals
1 - Headphone audio signal output, right, positive
2 - CD changer, left and right channels, earth
3 - Headphone audio signal output, audio earth
4 - CD changer, voltage supply, positive, terminal 30
5 - Headphone audio signal output, left, positive
6 - CD changer, DATA OUT (data exchange for CD changer con‐
trol from radio to CD changer)
7 - Not assigned
8 - CD changer, left channel, CD/L
9 - CD changer, right channel, CD/R
10 - CD changer, control signal
11 - CD changer, DATA IN (data exchange for CD changer control
from CD changer to radio)
12 - CD changer, CLOCK (internal check protocol for data flow
monitoring)

12. Radio navigation systems “RNS 2-CD” and “RNS 2-DVD” 109
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Connectors 7 and 8, aerial connections


1 - Transparent connection for FM aerial input signal from aerial
selection control unit.
2 - Brown connection for FM aerial output signal to aerial selection
control unit (diversity function).
The aerial input signal from connection 1 is checked in the radio
and the result is output again via connection 2 to the aerial se‐
lection control unit. If the aerial signal being received is too weak,
this then switches to a different aerial (diversity function). The
customer will not be able to perceive this procedure audibly.

Note

No control unit for aerial selection is installed in combination with


the “RNS 2-DVD” radio navigation system, as the diversity func‐
tion is directly integrated in the unit for this radio navigation
system. The two aerial connections on the radio navigation sys‐
tem are then strictly aerial inputs from the side window aerials.

12.5 Anti-theft coding - radio navigation sys‐


tems “RNS 2-CD” and “RNS 2-DVD”
Radio/navigation system “RNS 2-CD” or radio/navigation system
“RNS 2-DVD” is equipped with a convenience electronic anti-theft
system, which is effective in combination with the dash panel in‐
sert.
After disconnecting the radio navigation system's voltage supply,
system operation is restored when reconnecting the voltage sup‐
ply without entering the code number. The prerequisites are that
initial activation of the anti-theft coding has been performed and
the radio navigation system is reconnected in the same vehicle.
Determining anti-theft code of anti-theft coding via vehicle diag‐
nostic tester:
The anti-theft code can be determined by means of the vehicle
diagnostic tester . The radio card used in the past and the sticker
on the radio have been discontinued.

Note

To determine the anti-theft code, the vehicle diagnostic tester


must be “online” (network connection), and the user must be au‐
thorised to use the program to retrieve radio codes.

– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐


eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio or radio navigation system
♦ Functions

110 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

♦ Radio code request


Your system rights are then determined. The operating data, the
VIN and the unit number of the radio or radio/navigation system
are then read out automatically.

Note

During installation of new radios, or radios and radio/navigation


systems which are not adapted to the vehicle, the tester might not
be able to read the device number of the radio or the radio/navi‐
gation system. In this case, enter the number manually. It can be
found on the sticker affixed to the unit and is also stamped onto
the side of the unit.

The radio code which has been determined is then shown on the
tester's display.
The anti-theft code must be entered manually into the radio or
radio navigation system ⇒ page 111 .
Deactivating anti-theft coding:

Note

The code sticker on the unit and the radio code card have been
successively discontinued for radios and radio navigation sys‐
tems as of 11.06. If a new radio or radio navigation system, in
which no sticker or radio card is enclosed, is installed, the anti-
theft code must be determined using the vehicle diagnostic tester.
Determine anti-theft code of anti-theft coding via vehicle diagnos‐
tic tester ⇒ page 110 .

A blocked radio navigation system can only be returned to normal


operation by entering the correct code number for the anti-theft
coding.

Note

♦ The anti-theft code number is stuck on the radio card together


with the unit number ⇒ Operating manual .
♦ The radio card should not be kept in the vehicle for security
reasons. Request code number from customer, if necessary.
♦ If a radio/navigation system is renewed, the code number of
the replacement unit also must be used.
♦ The customer must be informed that the code number has
changed.

– Obtain the code number of the unit, using the familiar EDP
systems, if necessary.
– Switch radio navigation system on.
The word “SAFE” and the number sequence “0000” appear in the
display.
– Enter the code number that has been adhered to the radio card
by marking the numbers from the letters and numbers selec‐
tion box one after another and confirming using the rotary
pushbutton on the right.

12. Radio navigation systems “RNS 2-CD” and “RNS 2-DVD” 111
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Note

Entering the 1st number overwrites the row of figures “0000”.

– Once the anti-theft code has been entered, press the but-
ton located next to “OK” on the display.

The unit will be released and is ready for use.

Note

If you enter an incorrect anti-theft code, you can immediately


make 2 new attempts to enter the correct code. If the wrong anti-
theft code is entered three times, the radio navigation system is
blocked for one hour. In this case, leave radio navigation system
and ignition switched on. The process for deactivating the anti-
theft coding can then be repeated after one hour. You always
have three attempts to enter the code, then the radio navigation
system will be blocked for one hour.

12.6 Adapting components - radio navigation


systems “RNS 2-CD” and “RNS 2-DVD”
Adapting radio components:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio or radio navigation system
♦ Radio functions
Adapting navigation system components:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio or radio navigation system
♦ Functions navigation

112 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

13. Radio navigation system “RNS 310” 113


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

13 Radio navigation system “RNS 310”


⇒ “13.1 General description - radio navigation system RNS 310
”, page 114
⇒ “13.2 Overview of fitting locations - radio navigation system
RNS 310 ”, page 116
⇒ “13.3 Removing and installing radio navigation system RNS
310 ”, page 117
⇒ “13.4 Pin assignment - radio navigation system RNS 310 ”,
page 120
⇒ “13.5 Anti-theft coding - radio navigation system RNS 310 ”,
page 122
⇒ “13.6 Adapting components - radio navigation system RNS 310
”, page 124

13.1 General description - radio navigation


system “RNS 310”
Radio navigation system “RNS 310”

Note

♦ The part number for the radio navigation system is printed on


a sticker on the radio navigation system housing!
♦ If the radio navigation system is renewed, it is essential to de‐
activate the anti-theft coding (Deactivating anti-theft coding
⇒ page 122 ). The new code number should be given to the
customer.
♦ If the anti-theft code is not known it can be requested via the
established systems. You need the identification number of
the radio navigation system in order to make the request. It is
located on a sticker on the side of the radio. In addition, the
identification number is also stamped into the material of the
side wall of the radio navigation system.
♦ If a radio/navigation system from one vehicle is installed in
another vehicle:
♦ The part number of the replacement unit must be the same as
that of the unit previously installed. Otherwise faults will occur
with the navigation because the turn angle sensor setting in
the radio navigation system will not be compatible with the ve‐
hicle.

114 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Note

♦ When faced with complaints, it is absolutely necessary to


know the functions and the operation of the radio navigation
system.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Operating manual ⇒ Self-study pro‐
gramme No. 397 ; Radio navigation systems 2007 .
♦ The anti-theft coding uses a fixed code, deactivating anti-theft
coding ⇒ page 122 .
♦ In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the ⇒ vehicle
diagnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode ⇒ Current
flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
♦ For perfect operation of the navigation system, the turn angle
sensor in the unit is adjusted according to the installation po‐
sition of the unit in the vehicle. Therefore, always note the part
number when exchanging equipment. Incorrect installation
could lead to a malfunction in the navigation system.
♦ When the battery is reconnected, check the items of equip‐
ment in the vehicle (radio, clock, convenience electronics etc.)
with reference to the workshop manual and/or operating in‐
structions and adjust them if necessary.

The CD drive can read a CD ROM for navigation or a music CD.


Whilst a music CD is playing, only restricted operation of the nav‐
igation system is possible.

Note

♦ CDs with mp3 format music files can also be played in addition
to normal audio CDs. For further details, refer to ⇒ “RNS 310”
operating manual .
♦ Music CDs with 8 cm diameter (mini discs) cannot be played.
♦ CDs containing both computer data and music cannot be
played.

The aerial is integrated into the exterior mirrors. The aerial system
includes a “diversity function” integrated in the radio.
Radio navigation system “RNS 310” has following features:
♦ 5-inch colour display, 400 x 240 pixels
♦ Diversity function (2 tuners)
♦ Integrated CD drive
♦ SD memory card reader
♦ AUX IN on front of unit via jack connector
♦ UTP low/premium (stereo input)
♦ MP3 play function
♦ Navigation function via 3-D map and speech
♦ CD/SD navigation (navigation without inserted CD)
♦ Multimedia socket
♦ OPS (optional parking system)
♦ Air conditioning system information via radio display
♦ External sound amplifier, controllable

13. Radio navigation system “RNS 310” 115


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

♦ RDS
♦ 2 or 4 x 20 watt output power
♦ AUX-IN connection
♦ External CD changer connection without MP3
♦ Support for multifunction steering wheel
♦ Support for multifunction display Plus
♦ Speed-dependent volume control (GALA)
♦ Self-diagnosis, including loudspeaker diagnosis
♦ CAN, TP 2.0, BAP
♦ Convenience coding
♦ Travel information memory (TIM)
Fault detection and fault display:
The radio navigation system is equipped with self-diagnosis.
In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the vehicle di‐
agnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode.

13.2 Overview of fitting locations - radio navigation system “RNS 310”

1 - Front passenger side exte‐


rior mirror - VX5- with aerial
system
❑ Installed in right exterior
mirror.
❑ Diversity aerial system
❑ The aerial version is
technically adapted to
the vehicle's equipment.
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
2 - Amplifier - R12-
❑ Installation is optional.
❑ Fitting location: under
right front seat.
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Sound system
amplifier" ⇒ page 173 .
3 - Control unit with display for
radio and navigation - J503-
❑ Radio navigation sys‐
tem “RNS 310”
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 117
❑ Anti-theft coding
⇒ page 122 .
❑ Adapting components
⇒ page 124
❑ Connector pin assign‐
ment ⇒ page 120 .

116 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

4 - Connection for external audio source - R199- in radio/navigation system


❑ Installed in front panel of radio navigation system “RNS 310”.
❑ Additional information: ⇒ Operating manual for radio navigation system “RNS 310”.
5 - Multifunction buttons on left in steering wheel - E440- and multifunction buttons on right in steering wheel -
E441-
❑ Additional information: chapter "Multifunction steering wheel" ⇒ page 285 .
6 - Rear right bass loudspeaker - R17- , rear left bass loudspeaker - R15- , rear right treble loudspeaker - R16-
and rear left treble loudspeaker - R14-
❑ Installation is optional.
❑ Installed in left and right side panel trims in passenger compartment.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Sound system" ⇒ page 162 .
7 - Front right bass loudspeaker - R23- and front left bass loudspeaker - R21-
❑ Installed in left and right doors.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Sound system" ⇒ page 162 .
8 - Driver side exterior mirror - VX4- with aerial system
❑ Installed in left exterior mirror.
❑ Diversity aerial system
❑ The aerial version is technically adapted to the vehicle's equipment.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Aerial systems" ⇒ page 238 .
9 - Multimedia system control unit - J650-
❑ Installed in area of anti-vibration brace beneath dash panel insert.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Multimedia system control unit" ⇒ page 151 .
10 - Front right treble loudspeaker - R22- and front left treble loudspeaker - R20-
❑ Installed in dash panel on left and right.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Sound system" ⇒ page 162 .
11 - Connection for external audio source - R199- and USB connection retainer - R193-
❑ Installed in glove compartment.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Multimedia control unit" ⇒ page 151 .

13.3 Removing and installing radio naviga‐


tion system “RNS 310”
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Removal wedge - 3409-

Removing:
– Remove any CDs left in the unit ⇒ Operating manual .
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

13. Radio navigation system “RNS 310” 117


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Unclip storage compartment -1- above radio navigation sys‐


tem.

– Unscrew securing bolts -1-.


– First carefully unclip cover -2- at top and then at bottom using
removal wedge - 3409- . Then remove cover.

– Unscrew securing bolts -arrows- on radio/radio navigation


system.
– Pull radio/radio navigation system out of installation slot until
you can access connectors at rear of unit.

Connectors at rear of unit:


1- Multi-pin connector
2- This aerial connector is not available on this unit
3- Aerial connector 1 for radio reception
4- This aerial connector is not available on this unit

Note

The number and the fitting locations of connectors on the unit can
vary according to the different radios or radio/navigation systems.

118 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Press locking mechanism of connector together in


-direction of arrow-.

– Swivel locking bar up in -direction of arrow- and pull out con‐


nector.

– Release and disconnect connectors -arrows- from aerial con‐


nections.

Note

The number of connectors on the unit can vary according to the


different radio or radio navigation systems.

Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Connect connectors to radio and engage them.

Caution

Risk of damage to display and operating keys!


When inserting the radio navigation system into the installation
slot by pressing against the display or operating keys, the unit
could become damaged.
When inserting the radio navigation system never press
against the display or operating keys.

– Slide radio navigation system straight into dash panel.

13. Radio navigation system “RNS 310” 119


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Screw in and tighten the 4 securing bolts -arrows-.


– If necessary, deactivate anti-theft coding ⇒ page 122 .
– Check coding of radio and re-code if necessary ⇒ page 124 .

13.4 Pin assignment - radio navigation system “RNS 310”

1 - Multi-pin connector 1, 8-pin


❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 121
2 - Multi-pin connector 2, 8-pin
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 121
3 - Multi-pin connector 3, 12-
pin
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 121
4 - Multi-pin connector 4, 12-
pin
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 122
5 - Connector 5
❑ Aerial connection for
navigation system
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 122
6 - Connector 6
❑ Aerial connection for ra‐
dio reception
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 122
6 - Connector 7
❑ Aerial connection for ra‐
dio reception
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 122

120 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector 1, 8-pin, for loudspeaker outputs


1 - Rear right loudspeaker, positive
2 - Front right loudspeaker, positive
3 - Front left loudspeaker, positive
4 - Rear left loudspeaker, positive
5 - Rear right loudspeaker, negative
6 - Front right loudspeaker, negative
7 - Front left loudspeaker, negative
8 - Rear left loudspeaker, negative

Multi-pin connector 2, 8-pin, for voltage supply wires and CAN


bus
9 - CAN bus, High
10 - CAN bus, Low
11 - Voltage supply, positive, switched on
12 - Terminal 31 voltage supply, negative
13 - CAN bus high speed display, negative
14 - CAN bus high speed display, positive
15 - Terminal 30 voltage supply, positive
16 - Control signal for anti-theft coding, SAFE

Multi-pin connector 3, 12-pin, for telephone signals


1 - Microphone input, negative
2 - AUX audio output, right, positive
3 - AUX audio output, earth
4 - Microphone output, negative
5 - Telephone audio input signal left, negative
6 - Telephone audio input signal right, negative
7 - Microphone input, positive
8 - AUX audio output, left, negative
9 - Microphone output, positive
10 - Telephone mute (mute switch for radio)
11 - Telephone audio input signal left, positive
12 - Telephone audio input signal right, positive

13. Radio navigation system “RNS 310” 121


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector 4, 12-pin, for CD changer control and CD au‐


dio input signals
1 - AUX signal input, left
2 - AUX signal earth
3 - CD changer, audio signal ground
4 - CD changer, voltage supply, positive, terminal 30, contact
continuous load greater than 1 A, temporary peak load 5 A
5 - Not assigned
6 - CD changer, (data exchange for CD changer control from ra‐
dio/navigation system to CD changer)
7 - AUX signal input, right
8 - CD changer, left audio channel, CD/L
9 - CD changer, right audio channel, CD/R
10 - CD changer, control line, switched positive
11 - CD changer, (data exchange for CD changer control from CD
changer to radio/navigation system)
12 - CD changer, clock (internal check protocol for data flow mon‐
itoring)

Connectors 5, 6 and 7, aerial connections


1 - AM and FM radio reception aerial connector
2 - FM 2 radio reception aerial connector
3 - Navigation aerial connector (GPS), coding C, impedance 50
ohms, colour signal blue

13.5 Anti-theft coding - radio navigation sys‐


tem “RNS 310”
Radio navigation system “RNS 310” is equipped with conven‐
ience anti-theft coding, which is effective in combination with the
dash panel insert.
After disconnecting the radio/navigation system's voltage supply,
system operation is restored when reconnecting the voltage sup‐
ply without entering the anti-theft code. The prerequisites are that
initial activation of the anti-theft coding has been performed and
the radio navigation system is reconnected in the same vehicle.
A blocked radio navigation system can only be returned to normal
operation by entering the correct code number for the anti-theft
coding.
The anti-theft code can be determined by means of the vehicle
diagnostic tester ⇒ page 123 . The radio card used in the past
and the sticker on the radio have been discontinued.

122 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Note

To determine the anti-theft code, the vehicle diagnostic tester


must be “online”. The user must have valid authorisation for the
programme to request anti-theft codes.

Determining anti-theft code of anti-theft coding via vehicle diag‐


nostic tester:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio or radio navigation system
♦ Functions
♦ Radio code request
Your system rights are then determined. The operating data, the
VIN number and the unit number of the radio or radio/navigation
system are then read out automatically.

Note

During installation of new radios, or radios and radio/navigation


systems which are not adapted to the vehicle, the tester might not
be able to read the device number of the radio or the radio/navi‐
gation system. In this case, enter the number manually. It can be
found on the sticker affixed to the unit and is also stamped onto
the side of the unit.

The radio code which has been determined is then shown on the
tester's display.
The anti-theft code must be entered manually into the radio or
radio navigation system ⇒ page 123 .
Deactivating anti-theft coding:
– Switch radio navigation system on.
– Now enter the previously determined anti-theft code in the
number block shown on the display of the radio navigation
system “RNS 310” and confirm it.
The unit will be released and is ready for use.

13. Radio navigation system “RNS 310” 123


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Note

If you enter an incorrect anti-theft code, you can immediately


make a new attempt to enter the correct code. If the wrong anti-
theft code is entered two times, the radio navigation system is
blocked for one hour. In this case, leave radio navigation system
and ignition switched on. The remaining time is shown on the ra‐
dio navigation system display. The process for deactivating the
anti-theft coding can then be repeated after one hour. There are
always two attempts to enter the code, then the radio navigation
system will be blocked for one hour.

13.6 Adapting components - radio navigation


system “RNS 310”
Adapting radio components:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio or radio navigation system
♦ Radio functions
Adapting navigation system components:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio or radio navigation system
♦ Functions navigation

124 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

14. Radio navigation system “RNS 315” 125


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

14 Radio navigation system “RNS 315”


⇒ “14.1 General description - radio navigation system RNS 315
”, page 126
⇒ “14.2 Overview of fitting locations - radio navigation system
RNS 315 ”, page 127
⇒ “14.3 Removing and installing radio navigation system RNS
315 ”, page 129
⇒ “14.4 Pin assignment - radio navigation system RNS 315 ”,
page 131
⇒ “14.5 Anti-theft coding - radio navigation system RNS 315 ”,
page 134
⇒ “14.6 Adapting components - radio navigation system RNS 315
”, page 136

14.1 General description - radio navigation


system “RNS 315”
Radio navigation system “RNS 315”

Note

♦ The part number for the radio navigation system is printed on


a sticker on the radio navigation system housing!
♦ If the radio navigation system is renewed, it is essential to de‐
activate the anti-theft coding (Deactivating anti-theft coding
⇒ page 134 ). The new code number should be given to the
customer.
♦ If the anti-theft code is not known it can be requested via the
established systems. You need the identification number of
the radio navigation system in order to make the request. It is
located on a sticker on the side of the radio. In addition, the
identification number is also stamped into the material of the
side wall of the radio navigation system.

Note

♦ When faced with complaints, it is absolutely necessary to


know the functions and the operation of the radio navigation
system.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Operating manual ⇒ Self-study pro‐
gramme No. 397 ; Radio navigation systems 2007 .
♦ The anti-theft coding uses a fixed code, deactivating anti-theft
coding ⇒ page 134 .
♦ In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the ⇒ vehicle
diagnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode ⇒ Current
flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
♦ When the battery is reconnected, check the items of equip‐
ment in the vehicle (radio, clock, convenience electronics etc.)
with reference to the workshop manual and/or operating in‐
structions and adjust them if necessary.

126 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Note

♦ CDs with mp3 format music files can also be played in addition
to normal audio CDs. For further details, refer to ⇒ “RNS 315”
operating manual .
♦ Music CDs with 8 cm diameter (mini discs) cannot be played.

The aerial is integrated into the exterior mirrors. The aerial system
includes a “diversity function” integrated in the radio.
Radio navigation system “RNS 315” has following features:
♦ 5-inch colour display, 400 x 240 pixels
♦ Diversity function (2 tuners)
♦ Integrated CD drive
♦ SD memory card reader
♦ AUX IN on front of unit via jack connector
♦ UTP low/premium (stereo input)
♦ MP3 play function
♦ Navigation function via 3-D map and speech
♦ CD/SD navigation (navigation without inserted CD)
♦ Multimedia socket
♦ OPS (optional parking system)
♦ Air conditioning system information via radio display
♦ External sound amplifier, controllable
♦ RDS FM/AM European radio with diversity function and TMC
♦ 2 or 4 x 20 watt output power
♦ External CD changer connection without MP3
♦ Support for multifunction steering wheel
♦ Support for multifunction display Plus
♦ Speed-dependent volume control (GALA)
♦ Self-diagnosis, including loudspeaker diagnosis
♦ CAN, TP 2.0, BAP
♦ Convenience coding
The “Plus version” of the “RNS 315” radio navigation system also
has the following additional features:
♦ A DAB tuner for receiving digital radio signals
♦ A mobile phone preparation which is integrated in device to‐
gether with Bluetooth aerial.
♦ Image from optional reversing camera shown on radio display
Fault detection and fault display:
The radio navigation system is equipped with self-diagnosis.
In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the vehicle di‐
agnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode.

14.2 Overview of fitting locations - radio navigation system “RNS 315”

14. Radio navigation system “RNS 315” 127


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Front passenger side exte‐


rior mirror - VX5- with aerial
system
❑ Installed in right exterior
mirror.
❑ Diversity aerial system
❑ The aerial version is
technically adapted to
the vehicle's equipment.
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
2 - Amplifier - R12-
❑ Installation is optional.
❑ Fitting location: under
right front seat.
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Sound system
amplifier" ⇒ page 173 .
3 - Control unit with display for
radio and navigation - J503-
❑ Radio navigation sys‐
tem “RNS 315”
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 129
❑ Overview of connectors
⇒ page 131
❑ Anti-theft coding
⇒ page 134 .
❑ Connector pin assign‐
ment ⇒ page 131 .
4 - Connection for external au‐
dio source - R199- in radio/
navigation system
❑ Installed in front panel of radio navigation system “RNS 315”.
❑ Additional information: ⇒ Operating manual for radio navigation system “RNS 315”.
5 - Multifunction buttons on left in steering wheel - E440- and multifunction buttons on right in steering wheel -
E441-
❑ Additional information: chapter "Multifunction steering wheel" ⇒ page 285 .
6 - Rear right bass loudspeaker - R17- , rear left bass loudspeaker - R15- , rear right treble loudspeaker - R16-
and rear left treble loudspeaker - R14-
❑ Installation is optional.
❑ Installed in left and right side panel trims in passenger compartment.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Sound system" ⇒ page 162 .
7 - Front right bass loudspeaker - R23- and front left bass loudspeaker - R21-
❑ Installed in left and right doors.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Sound system" ⇒ page 162 .
8 - Driver side exterior mirror - VX4- with aerial system
❑ Installed in left exterior mirror.
❑ Diversity aerial system
❑ The aerial version is technically adapted to the vehicle's equipment.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Aerial systems" ⇒ page 238 .
9 - Multimedia system control unit - J650-
❑ Installed in area of anti-vibration brace beneath dash panel insert.

128 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019
❑ Additional information: chapter "Multimedia system control unit" ⇒ page 151 .
10 - Front right treble loudspeaker - R22- and front left treble loudspeaker - R20-
❑ Installed in dash panel on left and right.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Sound system" ⇒ page 162 .
11 - Connection for external audio source - R199- and USB connection retainer - R193-
❑ Installed in glove compartment.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Multimedia control unit" ⇒ page 151 .

14.3 Removing and installing radio naviga‐


tion system “RNS 315”
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Removal wedge - 3409-

Removing:
– Remove any CDs left in the unit ⇒ Operating manual .
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Unclip storage compartment -1- above radio/navigation sys‐
tem.

– Remove bolts -1-. First carefully unclip cover -2- at top and
then at bottom using removal wedge - 3409- . Then remove
cover.

14. Radio navigation system “RNS 315” 129


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Unscrew securing bolts -arrows- on radio/radio navigation


system.
– Pull radio/radio navigation system out of installation slot until
connectors on rear of radio/radio navigation system can be
accessed.

Connectors at rear of unit:


1- Multi-pin connector
2- Aerial connector for navigation
3- Aerial connector 1 for radio reception
4- Aerial connector 2 for radio reception

Note

The number and the fitting locations of connectors on the unit can
vary according to the different radios or radio/navigation systems.

– Press locking mechanism of connector together in


-direction of arrow-.

– Swivel locking bar in -direction of arrow- and pull out connec‐


tor.

130 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Press fuse -A- on audio/video connector and swing bar in


-direction of arrow B-. This causes the connector to be pushed
out.

– Release securing mechanism on all aerial connections


-arrows- and pull out connectors.

Note

The number and positioning of connectors on the unit can vary


between the different radios or radio navigation systems.

Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Connect connectors to radio and engage them.

Caution

Risk of damage to display and operating keys!


When inserting the radio navigation system into the installation
slot by pressing against the display or operating keys, the unit
could become damaged.
When inserting the radio navigation system never press
against the display or operating keys.

– Slide radio navigation system straight into dash panel.

– Screw in and tighten the 4 securing bolts -arrows-.


– Remount centre console cover.
– If necessary, deactivate anti-theft coding ⇒ page 134 .
– Check coding of radio and re-code if necessary ⇒ page 134 .

14.4 Pin assignment - radio navigation system “RNS 315”

14. Radio navigation system “RNS 315” 131


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Connection for digital radio


reception (DAB)
❑ Optional
2 - Multi-pin connector 1, 8-pin
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 132
3 - Multi-pin connector 2, 8-pin
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 133
4 - Multi-pin connector 3, 12-
pin
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 133
5 - Multi-pin connector 4, 12-
pin
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 133
6 - Multi-pin connector, 26-pin
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 134
7 - Connector 5
❑ Aerial connection for
navigation system
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 134
8 - Connector 6
❑ Aerial connection for ra‐
dio reception
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 134
9 - Connector 7
❑ Aerial connection for radio reception
❑ Pin assignment ⇒ page 134

Multi-pin connector 1, 8-pin, for loudspeaker outputs


1 - Rear right loudspeaker, positive
2 - Front right loudspeaker, positive
3 - Front left loudspeaker, positive
4 - Rear left loudspeaker, positive
5 - Rear right loudspeaker, negative
6 - Front right loudspeaker, negative
7 - Front left loudspeaker, negative
8 - Rear left loudspeaker, negative

132 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector 2, 8-pin, for voltage supply wires and CAN


bus
9 - CAN bus, High
10 - CAN bus, Low
11 - Not assigned
12 - Terminal 31 voltage supply, negative
13 - Not assigned
14 - Not assigned
15 - Terminal 30 voltage supply, positive
16 - Control signal for anti-theft coding, SAFE, plus

Multi-pin connector 3, 12-pin, for telephone signals


1 - Microphone input, negative
2 - Not assigned
3 - Not assigned
4 - Not assigned
5 - Telephone audio input signal left, negative
6 - Telephone audio input signal right, negative
7 - Microphone output, positive
8 - Not assigned
9 - Not assigned
10 - Telephone mute (mute switch for radio)
11 - Telephone audio input signal left, positive
12 - Telephone audio input signal right, positive

Multi-pin connector 4, 12-pin, for CD changer control and CD au‐


dio input signals
1 - AUX signal input, left
2 - AUX signal earth
3 - CD changer, audio signal ground
4 - CD changer, voltage supply, positive, terminal 30, contact
continuous load greater than 1 A, temporary peak load 5 A
5 - Not assigned
6 - CD changer, (data exchange for CD changer control from ra‐
dio/navigation system to CD changer)
7 - AUX signal input, right
8 - CD changer, left audio channel, CD/L
9 - CD changer, right audio channel, CD/R
10 - CD changer, control line, switched positive
11 - CD changer, (data exchange for CD changer control from CD
changer to radio/navigation system)
12 - CD changer, clock (internal check protocol for data flow mon‐
itoring)

14. Radio navigation system “RNS 315” 133


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector, 26-pin, for audio and video signals


1 - Reserved for Debug RX protocol
2 - Reserved for Debug TX protocol
3 - Not assigned
4 - Video signal input, blue, negative
5 - Not assigned
6 - Mobile phone detection
7 - Key cradle
8 - Aerial diagnostics
9 - Video signal input, green, negative
10 - Not assigned
11 - Video signal input, screening earth
12 - Video signal input, vertical and horizontal synchronisation
13 - Video signal input, green
14 - Debug, negative
15 - Not assigned
16 - Not assigned
17 - Not assigned
18 - Not assigned
19 - Cradle, negative
20 - Terminal 30 voltage supply, positive
21 - Not assigned
22 - Not assigned
23 - Not assigned
24 - Video signal input, synchronisation, red, negative
25 - Video signal input, blue
26 - Video signal input, red

Connectors for aerial connections


1 - AM and FM radio reception aerial connector
2 - FM 2 radio reception aerial connector
3 - Navigation aerial connector (GPS), coding C, impedance 50
ohms, colour signal blue

14.5 Anti-theft coding - radio navigation sys‐


tem “RNS 315”
The “R 315” radio navigation system is equipped with an anti-theft
coding device, which works in combination with the dash panel
insert.

134 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

After disconnecting the radio navigation system's voltage supply,


system operation is restored when reconnecting the voltage sup‐
ply without entering the code number. The prerequisites are that
initial activation of the anti-theft coding has been performed and
the radio navigation system is reconnected in the same vehicle.
A blocked radio navigation system can only be returned to normal
operation by entering the correct code number for the anti-theft
coding.
The anti-theft code can be determined by means of the vehicle
diagnostic tester. The radio card used in the past and the sticker
on the radio have been discontinued.

Note

To determine the anti-theft code, the vehicle diagnostic tester


must be “online” (network connection). The user must also have
valid authorisation for the programme to request anti-theft codes.

Determining anti-theft code of anti-theft coding via vehicle diag‐


nostic tester:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio or radio navigation system
♦ Functions
♦ Radio code request
Your system rights are then determined. The operating data, the
VIN and the unit number of the radio or radio navigation system
are then read out automatically.

Note

During installation of new radios, or radios navigation systems


which are not adapted to the vehicle, the tester might not be able
to read the device number of the radio navigation system. In this
case, enter the number manually. It can be found on the sticker
affixed to the unit and is also stamped onto the side of the unit.

The radio code which has been determined is then shown on the
tester's display.
The anti-theft code must be entered manually into the radio or
radio navigation system ⇒ page 135 .
Deactivating anti-theft coding:
– Switch radio navigation system on.
– Now enter the previously determined anti-theft code in the
number block of the “RNS 315” shown on the display and con‐
firm it.

14. Radio navigation system “RNS 315” 135


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

The unit will be released and is ready for use.

Note

If you enter an incorrect code to deactivate the electronic lock,


“WARNING: incorrect code” first flashes in the display, followed
by the number block again. The entire procedure can be repeated
twice. The number of attempts is shown on the display. If an in‐
correct code is entered again for a third time, the unit is locked for
approx. 1 hour. This means that it cannot be operated. The lock-
out can be recognised by the permanently displayed message
“WARNING: system is locked. Please wait 60 minutes.” After one
hour (during which the ignition and the unit must remain switched
on), the indicated number of attempts is extinguished and the
electronic lock can be deactivated as described above. The
»three attempts, blocked for one hour« cycle still applies.

14.6 Adapting components - radio navigation


system “RNS 315”
Adapting radio components:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio navigation system
♦ Functions
♦ Code radio
Adapting navigation system components:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio navigation system
♦ Functions
♦ Code navigation system

136 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

15 Radio navigation system “RNS 510”


⇒ “15.1 General description - radio navigation system RNS 510
”, page 137
⇒ “15.2 Overview of fitting locations - radio navigation system
RNS 510 ”, page 138
⇒ “15.3 Removing and installing radio navigation system RNS
510 ”, page 140
⇒ “15.4 Pin assignment - radio navigation system RNS 510 ”,
page 145
⇒ “15.5 Anti-theft coding - radio navigation system RNS 510 ”,
page 148
⇒ “15.6 Adapting components - radio navigation system RNS 510
”, page 150

15.1 General description - radio navigation


system “RNS 510”
There are two versions of the “RNS 510” in the Transporter from
model year 2010 onwards:
“RNS 510” in Multivan vehicles with convenience dash panel
The radio navigation system is held in position with clips. Pullers
must be used to remove it ⇒ page 140 .

15. Radio navigation system “RNS 510” 137


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

“RNS 510” in all other vehicle types


The radio navigation system is held in position with bolts. It is
removed by unscrewing the bolts ⇒ page 142 .
Radio/navigation system “RNS 510” combines the functions of a
navigation system with those of a high-quality radio.
The main functions are described in the following:
♦ RDS radio receiver
♦ 6.5 inch multicolour touch screen
♦ Navigation system with GPS satellite receiver
♦ Integrated diversity function
♦ DVD player for navigation, video and audio
♦ SD memory card slot
♦ Hard disc for saving data, integrated in the unit
♦ Corridor function
♦ MP3 and WMA playback formats
The radio navigation system “RNS 510” is equipped with 4 loud‐
speaker outputs.
The “RNS 510” can be extended with the following components:
♦ CD changer
♦ Multifunction steering wheel
♦ TV tuner
♦ Sound amplifier
♦ Universal preparation for mobile telephone
♦ Rear seat entertainment system
The aerial is integrated into the exterior mirrors. The aerial system
version has a “diversity function” integrated in the radio.
Additional information ⇒ Operating manual ⇒ Self-study pro‐
gramme No. 397 ; Radio navigation systems 2007 .
Fault detection and fault display:
The radio navigation system is equipped with self-diagnosis.
In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the vehicle di‐
agnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode.

15.2 Overview of fitting locations - radio navigation system “RNS 510”

138 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - CD changer - R41-
❑ Fitting location under
front passenger seat
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 155
2 - Digital TV tuner - R171-
❑ Hybrid tuner for ana‐
logue and digital TV re‐
ception.
❑ Fitting location: under
right front seat.
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 157
3 - Amplifier - R12-
❑ Installation is optional.
❑ Fitting location: under
right front seat.
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Sound system
amplifier" ⇒ page 173 .
4 - Control unit with display for
radio and navigation - J503-
❑ “RNS 510”
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 140
❑ Anti-theft coding
⇒ page 148 .
❑ Adapting components
⇒ page 150
❑ Connector pin assign‐
ment ⇒ page 145 .
5 - Multifunction buttons on left
in steering wheel - E440- and
multifunction buttons on right in steering wheel - E441-
❑ Additional information: chapter "Multifunction steering wheel" ⇒ page 285 .
6 - Rear right bass loudspeaker - R17- , rear left bass loudspeaker - R15- , rear right treble loudspeaker - R16-
and rear left treble loudspeaker - R14-
❑ Installation is optional.
❑ Installed in left and right side panel trims in passenger compartment.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Sound system" ⇒ page 162 .
7 - Front right bass loudspeaker - R23- and front left bass loudspeaker - R21-
❑ Installed in left and right doors.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Sound system" ⇒ page 162 .
8 - Driver side exterior mirror - VX4- with aerial system
❑ Installed in left exterior mirror.
❑ Diversity aerial system
❑ The aerial version is technically adapted to the vehicle's equipment.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Aerial systems" ⇒ page 238 .
9 - Multimedia system control unit - J650-
❑ Installed in area of anti-vibration brace beneath dash panel insert.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Multimedia system control unit" ⇒ page 151 .
10 - Front right treble loudspeaker - R22- and front left treble loudspeaker - R20-
❑ Installed in dash panel on left and right.

15. Radio navigation system “RNS 510” 139


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019
❑ Additional information: chapter "Sound system" ⇒ page 162 .
11 - Connection for external audio source - R199- and USB connection retainer - R193-
❑ Installed in glove compartment.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Multimedia control unit" ⇒ page 151 .
12 - Front passenger side exterior mirror - VX5- with aerial system
❑ Installed in right exterior mirror.
❑ Diversity aerial system
❑ The aerial version is technically adapted to the vehicle's equipment.
❑ Additional information: chapter "Aerial systems" ⇒ page 238 .

15.3 Removing and installing radio naviga‐


tion system “RNS 510”
⇒ “15.3.1 Removing and installing radio navigation system RNS
510, Multivan vehicles with convenience dash panel”, page 140
⇒ “15.3.2 Removing and installing radio navigation system RNS
510, all other vehicle models”, page 142

15.3.1 Removing and installing radio naviga‐


tion system “RNS 510”, Multivan vehi‐
cles with convenience dash panel
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Radio release tool - T10057-

Removing:
– Remove any CDs left in the unit ⇒ Operating manual .
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Slide release tool -T10057- into the release slots -arrows- until
they engage.
Top L - top and bottom on left
Top R - top and bottom on right

140 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Using the grip rings of the release tools, pull radio out of dash
panel -arrow- until connectors at rear are accessible.

Connectors at rear of unit:


1- Multi-pin connector
2- This aerial connector is not available on this unit
3- Aerial connector 1 for radio reception
4- This aerial connector is not available on this unit

Note

The number and the fitting locations of connectors on the unit can
vary according to the different radios or radio/navigation systems.

– Press locking mechanism of connector together in


-direction of arrow-.

– Swivel locking bar up in -direction of arrow- and pull out con‐


nector.

15. Radio navigation system “RNS 510” 141


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Release and disconnect connectors -arrows- on aerial con‐


nections.

Note

The number of connectors on the unit can vary according to the


different radio or radio navigation systems.

Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Connect connectors to radio and engage them.

Caution

Risk of damage to display and operating keys!


When inserting the radio navigation system into the installation
slot by pressing against the display or operating keys, the unit
could become damaged.
When inserting the radio navigation system never press
against the display or operating keys.

– Slide radio navigation system straight into dash panel and en‐
gage it.
– If necessary, deactivate anti-theft coding ⇒ page 148 .
– Check coding of radio and re-code if necessary ⇒ page 148 .

15.3.2 Removing and installing radio naviga‐


tion system “RNS 510”, all other vehicle
models
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Removal wedge - 3409-

Removing:
– Remove any CDs left in the unit ⇒ Operating manual .
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

142 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Unclip storage compartment -1- above radio.

– Unscrew securing bolts -1-.


– First carefully unclip cover -2- at top and then at bottom using
removal wedge - 3409- . Then remove cover.

– Unscrew securing bolts -arrows- on radio/radio navigation


system.
– Pull radio navigation system out of installation slot until you
can access connectors at rear of unit.

Connectors at rear of unit:


1- Multi-pin connector
2- This aerial connector is not available on this unit
3- Aerial connector 1 for radio reception
4- This aerial connector is not available on this unit

Note

The number and the fitting locations of connectors on the unit can
vary according to the different radios or radio/navigation systems.

15. Radio navigation system “RNS 510” 143


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Press locking mechanism of connector together in


-direction of arrow-.

– Swivel locking bar up in -direction of arrow- and pull out con‐


nector.

– Release and disconnect connectors -arrows- on aerial con‐


nections.

Note

The number of connectors on the unit can vary according to the


different radio or radio navigation systems.

Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Connect connectors to radio and engage them.

Caution

Risk of damage to display and operating keys!


When inserting the radio navigation system into the installation
slot by pressing against the display or operating keys, the unit
could become damaged.
When inserting the radio navigation system never press
against the display or operating keys.

– Slide radio navigation system straight into dash panel.

144 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Screw in and tighten the 4 securing bolts -arrows-.


– Install storage compartment and centre console cover.
– If necessary, deactivate anti-theft coding ⇒ page 148 .
– Check coding of radio and re-code if necessary ⇒ page 148 .

15.4 Pin assignment - radio navigation system “RNS 510”

1 - Connection for navigation,


Japan
❑ Not assigned
2 - Aerial connection
❑ DAB aerial connection
input, optional.
3 - Multi-pin connector 1, 8-pin
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 146
4 - Multi-pin connector 2, 8-pin
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 146
5 - Multi-pin connector 3, 12-
pin
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 146
6 - Multi-pin connector 4, 12-
pin
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 147
7 - Multi-pin connector, 26-pin
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 148
8 - Aerial connection
❑ For Navigation
❑ For further information
⇒ page 148
9 - Aerial connection
❑ FM 2 aerial
❑ For further information
⇒ page 148
10 - Aerial connection
❑ FM/AM aerial
❑ For further information ⇒ page 148

15. Radio navigation system “RNS 510” 145


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector 1, 8-pin, for loudspeaker outputs


1 - Rear right loudspeaker, positive
2 - Front right loudspeaker, positive
3 - Front left loudspeaker, positive
4 - Rear left loudspeaker, positive
5 - Rear right loudspeaker, negative
6 - Front right loudspeaker, negative
7 - Front left loudspeaker, negative
8 - Rear left loudspeaker, negative

Multi-pin connector 2, 8-pin, for voltage supply wires and CAN


bus
9 - CAN bus, High
10 - CAN bus, Low
11 - BOSE pin
12 - Terminal 31 voltage supply, negative
13 - Not assigned
14 - Not assigned
15 - Terminal 30 voltage supply, positive
16 - Control signal for anti-theft coding, SAFE, plus

Multi-pin connector 3, 12-pin, for telephone and microphone sig‐


nals
1 - Microphone input, negative
2 - Not assigned
3 - Not assigned
4 - Microphone output, negative
5 - Telephone audio input signal left, negative
6 - Telephone audio input signal right, negative
7 - Microphone input, positive
8 - Not assigned
9 - Microphone output, positive
10 - Telephone mute (mute switch for radio)
11 - Telephone audio input signal left, positive
12 - Telephone audio input signal right, positive

146 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector 4, 12-pin, for CD changer control and CD au‐


dio input signals
1 - AUX signal input, left
2 - AUX signal earth
3 - CD changer, audio signal ground
4 - CD changer, voltage supply, positive, terminal 30, contact
continuous load greater than 1 A, temporary peak load 5 A
5 - Not assigned
6 - CD changer, (data exchange for CD changer control from ra‐
dio/navigation system to CD changer)
7 - AUX signal input, right
8 - CD changer, left audio channel, CD/L
9 - CD changer, right audio channel, CD/R
10 - CD changer, control line, switched positive
11 - CD changer, (data exchange for CD changer control from CD
changer to radio/navigation system)
12 - CD changer, (internal check protocol for data flow monitoring)

15. Radio navigation system “RNS 510” 147


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector, audio and video, 26-pin


1 - Reserved for RX protocol
2 - Reserved for TX protocol
3 - Not assigned
4 - Not assigned
5 - Video signal output LF, right
6 - Video signal output, screening earth
7 - Video signal output, vertical and horizontal synchronisation
8 - Video signal output, green
9 - Not assigned
10 - Video signal input LF, right
11 - Video signal input, screening earth
12 - Video signal input, vertical and horizontal synchronisation
13 - Video signal input, green
14 - Not assigned
15 - Not assigned
16 - Not assigned
17 - Video signal output LF, negative
18 - Video signal output LF, left
19 - Video signal output, negative
20 - Video signal output, blue
21 - Video signal output, red
22 - Video signal input, LF, negative
23 - Video signal input LF, left
24 - Video signal input, negative
25 - Video signal input, blue
26 - Video signal input, red

Connectors 8-10, aerial connectors


1 - AM and FM radio reception aerial connector
2 - FM 2 radio reception aerial connector
3 - Navigation aerial connector

15.5 Anti-theft coding - radio navigation sys‐


tem “RNS 510”
Radio navigation system “RNS 510” is equipped with conven‐
ience anti-theft coding, which is effective in combination with the
dash panel insert.

148 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

After disconnecting the radio/navigation system's voltage supply,


system operation is restored when reconnecting the voltage sup‐
ply without entering the anti-theft code. The prerequisites are that
initial activation of the anti-theft coding has been performed and
the radio navigation system is reconnected in the same vehicle.
A blocked radio navigation system can only be returned to normal
operation by entering the correct code number for the anti-theft
coding.
The anti-theft code can be determined by means of the vehicle
diagnostic tester . The radio card used in the past and the sticker
on the radio have been discontinued.

Note

To determine the anti-theft code, the vehicle diagnostic tester


must be “online”. The user must have valid authorisation for the
programme to request anti-theft codes.

Determining anti-theft code of anti-theft coding via vehicle diag‐


nostic tester:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio or radio navigation system
♦ Functions
♦ Radio code request
Your system rights are then determined. The operating data, the
VIN number and the unit number of the radio or radio/navigation
system are then read out automatically.

Note

During installation of new radios or radio/navigation systems, the


tester might not be able to read the device number of the radio or
the radio/navigation system. In this case, please enter the unit
number manually. It can be found on the sticker affixed to the unit
and is also stamped onto the side of the unit.

The anti-theft code which has been determined is then shown on


the tester's display.
The anti-theft code must be entered in the radio navigation sys‐
tem manually ⇒ page 149 .
Deactivating anti-theft coding:
– Now enter the previously determined anti-theft code in the
number block of the “RNS 510” shown on the display and con‐
firm it.
The unit will be released and is ready for use.

15. Radio navigation system “RNS 510” 149


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Note

If you enter an incorrect anti-theft code, you can immediately


make a new attempt to enter the correct code. If the wrong anti-
theft code is entered two times, the radio navigation system is
blocked for one hour. In this case, leave radio navigation system
and ignition switched on. The remaining time is shown on the ra‐
dio navigation system display. The process for deactivating the
anti-theft coding can then be repeated after one hour. There are
always two attempts to enter the code, then the radio navigation
system will be blocked for one hour.

15.6 Adapting components - radio navigation


system “RNS 510”
Adapting radio components:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio navigation system
♦ Functions
♦ Code radio
Adapting navigation system components:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Radio navigation system
♦ Functions
♦ Code navigation system

150 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

16 Multimedia system control unit -


J650-
⇒ “16.1 General description - multimedia system control unit”,
page 151
⇒ “16.2 Fitting location overview - multimedia system control unit”,
page 151
⇒ “16.3 Removing and installing multimedia control unit”,
page 153
⇒ “16.4 Removing and installing the plug-in connection for the
multimedia control unit”, page 154

16.1 General description - multimedia system


control unit
Via the multimedia control unit - J650- , both analogue and digital
(via USB or iPod input) audio contents can be played via the radio
or the radio/navigation system. Units connected via the USB and
iPod connection can also be operated via the radio or radio nav‐
igation system. ID3-TAG and titles, for example, are also dis‐
played on the radio or radio/navigation system display.

Note

♦ The display capability of titles on the radio or the radio/navi‐


gation system display is dependent on the »characteristics«
of the audio files which are used. ⇒ Operating manual of radio/
radio navigation system.
♦ The display capability of titles on the radio or the radio/navi‐
gation system display is dependent on the »characteristics«
of the audio files which are used. ⇒ Operating manual for your
mp3 player or iPod.

The multimedia control unit - J650- provides an audio input, a


USB input and an iPod connection (power supply, signal and au‐
dio-in) as an interface. To connect the mobile unit to the USB or
iPod interface of the multimedia control unit - J650- , a relevant
specific adapter cable is used. Charging the connected unit is
possible via USB or iPod connections.

16.2 Fitting location overview - multimedia system control unit

16. Multimedia system control unit J650 151


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Sound system of radio or


radio navigation system
2 - Radio - R- and control unit
with display for radio and nav‐
igation - J503-
3 - Multifunction steering wheel
with multifunction buttons on
left in steering wheel - E440-
and multifunction buttons on
right in steering wheel - E441-
4 - CAN bus
5 - Wiring connection to multi‐
media system control unit
❑ The audio signal of the
player connected to the
socket for external au‐
dio sources enters the
multimedia control unit
via this line.
6 - Connection for external au‐
dio sources - R199-
7 - Line connection to onboard
supply control unit
❑ Communication line for
fault message from mul‐
timedia control unit to
onboard supply control
unit.
8 - Onboard supply control unit
- J519-
9 - Line connection from on‐
board supply control unit to
multimedia system control unit
❑ Voltage supply for mul‐
timedia control unit with
terminal 15, positive.
10 - Input unit for connection to multimedia system control unit
❑ MP3 player
❑ Data sticks
❑ iPod player
❑ Connection to multimedia control unit via USB port
11 - Line connection from multimedia control unit to USB connection retainer - R193-
❑ Connection socket is installed in glove compartment.
❑ Use of further specific adapter cables depending on device to be connected.
12 - Multimedia system control unit - J650-
❑ Installed in area of anti-vibration brace beneath dash panel insert.
13 - Data line from multimedia control unit to radio or radio/navigation system.
❑ Info from multimedia control unit to radio or radio/navigation system: multimedia control unit switched on.
14 - Data line from radio or radio/navigation system to multimedia control unit
❑ Info from radio or radio/navigation system to multimedia control unit: radio or radio/navigation system
switched on.
15 - LF wire
❑ Via this line connection, the audio signal of the connected unit runs from the multimedia control unit to
the connection for external audio sources of the radio or radio/navigation system.

152 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

16.3 Removing and installing multimedia


control unit
The multimedia control unit is fastened to the right-hand side of
the centre console above the accelerator pedal. You do not have
to take off any trims in order to remove the multimedia system
control unit.
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Release and disconnect connector -1- from multimedia sys‐
tem control unit.

– Push lever -arrow- to side and remove multimedia system


control unit, as far as the connected wiring allows.

– Release and disconnect connector -arrow-.


– Remove multimedia system control unit.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

16. Multimedia system control unit J650 153


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

16.4 Removing and installing the plug-in con‐


nection for the multimedia control unit
Due to the mounting conditions, multimedia players are connec‐
ted to the multimedia system control unit not directly but via a
plug-in connection in the glove compartment -arrow-.
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

– Release and disconnect wire connection -arrow- from con‐


nector.

– Pull off connection housing trim in -direction of arrow-.

– Remove glove compartment insert, until connector on side of


glove compartment -arrow- is accessible and can be removed.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

154 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

17 CD changer
⇒ “17.1 Removing and installing CD changer”, page 155

17.1 Removing and installing CD changer

Note

♦ If the CD changer plays commercial CDs but not self-recorded


CDs, the CD changer is not defective. The CD changer may
not be exchanged for this reason.
♦ No mix CDs can be played.
♦ Music CDs with 8 cm diameter (mini discs) cannot be played.
♦ The radio functions must be recoded if a CD changer is retro‐
fitted.

Note

The CD changer is installed under the right front seat.

Removing:
– Remove any CDs left in the unit ⇒ Operating manual .
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove right front seat ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 72 ; Front seats; Removing and installing front seat .
– If fitted, remove sound system amplifier ⇒ page 173 .
– Unscrew securing bolts on left and right of CD changer mount‐
ing frame -arrows-.

– Release and disconnect CD changer connector -arrows-.


– Remove CD changer together with mounting frame.

17. CD changer 155


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Unscrew securing bolts on left and right of CD changer mount‐


ing frame -arrows- and remove CD changer.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Caution

Risk of damage to CD changer!


If longer securing bolts than the original ones are used for se‐
curing the CD changer to the mounting frame, the CD changer
may be damaged.
Always use the intended securing bolts with the correct length
for securing the CD changer to the mounting frame.

156 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

18 TV tuner
⇒ “18.1 Removing and installing TV tuner, vehicles as of model
year 2010”, page 157

18.1 Removing and installing TV tuner, vehi‐


cles as of model year 2010

Note

TV tuner is installed beneath front passenger seat.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove front passenger seat ⇒ General body repairs, interi‐
or; Rep. gr. 72 ; Front seats; Removing and installing front
seat .
– If fitted, remove trailer detector control unit ⇒ Electrical sys‐
tem; Rep. gr. 97 .
– Release and disconnect connectors -1- and -2- on TV tuner.
– Release and disconnect connectors of all components (de‐
pending on equipment level) connected to carrier module.

– Unscrew the 4 securing bolts -arrows- from carrier module


-1-.
– Remove carrier module -1- from seat box.

Note

♦ For better clarity, the TV tuner is shown with carrier module


removed in the following illustration.
♦ The securing bolt for the TV tuner can be found on the right-
hand side of the carrier module.

18. TV tuner 157


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Remove securing bolt -arrow- on side.

– Press catches -arrows- on both sides and pull out TV tuner in


-direction of arrow A-.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

158 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

19 Connection for external audio sour‐


ces
⇒ “19.1 General description - connection for external audio sour‐
ces”, page 159
⇒ “19.2 Removing and installing connection for external audio
sources”, page 160
⇒ “19.3 Connector pin assignment - connection for external audio
sources”, page 161

19.1 General description - connection for ex‐


ternal audio sources
Vehicles up to model year 2009:
In the Transporter, the connection for external audio sources is
implemented via a stereo jack socket in the glove compartment
-arrow-.
The stereo jack socket is installed in the Multivan as optional
equipment in combination with the “DELTA” radio or the “RNS 2-
DVD” radio navigation system.
The connection for external audio sources allows audio signals
(generally headphone output signals) from mp3 players, portable
CD and cassette players to be fed into the radio or radio naviga‐
tion system with a respective wiring connection. These can then
be played via the vehicle loudspeakers.
For more detailed information, refer to the ⇒ Operating manual
for the corresponding radio or radio navigation system.
Vehicles as of model year 2010:

In the Transporter, the connection for external audio sources is


implemented via a stereo jack socket in the glove compartment
-arrow-.
In vehicles as of model year 2010, the connection for external
audio sources is available as optional equipment in combination
with each radio or radio/navigation system.
The connection for external audio sources allows audio signals
(generally headphone output signals) from mp3 players, portable
CD and cassette players to be fed into the radio or radio naviga‐
tion system with a respective wiring connection. These can then
be played via the vehicle loudspeakers.
For more detailed information, refer to the ⇒ Operating manual
for the corresponding radio or radio navigation system.

19. Connection for external audio sources 159


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

19.2 Removing and installing connection for


external audio sources
⇒ “19.2.1 Removing and installing connection for external audio
sources, vehicles up to model year 2009”, page 160
⇒ “19.2.2 Removing and installing connection for external audio
sources, vehicles as of model year 2010”, page 160

19.2.1 Removing and installing connection for


external audio sources, vehicles up to
model year 2009
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove glove compartment ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 68 ; Removing and installing glove compartment .
– Using a suitable small screwdriver, lever out the socket in
-direction of arrow-.
– Release and disconnect connector and remove socket.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

19.2.2 Removing and installing connection for


external audio sources, vehicles as of
model year 2010
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove glove compartment insert ⇒ General body repairs,
interior; Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments/covers; Removing and
installing glove compartment .
– Release and disconnect connector on socket for external au‐
dio sources -arrow-.

160 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Press spring clips on left and right -arrows- and push out sock‐
et towards front.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

19.3 Connector pin assignment - connection


for external audio sources
1 - Audio signal input, left, positive
2 - Common audio signal earth
3 - Audio signal input, right, positive

19. Connection for external audio sources 161


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

20 Sound system
⇒ “20.1 General description - sound system”, page 162
⇒ “20.2 Removing and installing front mid-range and treble loud‐
speakers”, page 164
⇒ “20.3 Removing and installing rear mid-range and treble loud‐
speakers”, page 167
⇒ “20.4 Removing and installing front bass loudspeakers”,
page 168
⇒ “20.5 Removing and installing rear bass loudspeakers”,
page 170
⇒ “20.6 Removing and installing rear loudspeakers in Camper”,
page 171

20.1 General description - sound system


⇒ “20.1.1 Sound system - vehicles up to 05.07”, page 162
⇒ “20.1.2 Sound system - vehicles as of 06.07 (not for vehicles
as of model year 2010)”, page 163

20.1.1 Sound system - vehicles up to 05.07


♦ The front sound system used in combination with “radio/navi‐
gation system 2” with MFD or with the “DELTA” radio consists
of a 3-way system with a bass loudspeaker in each door as
well as one mid-range and one treble loudspeaker each on the
left and right in the dash panel. In the rear of the vehicle, there
is a 3-way system on the left and right sides, each with a bass,
a mid-range and a treble loudspeaker.
♦ In combination with a sound system, a subwoofer can addi‐
tionally be installed behind the side trim in the rear left of the
vehicle.
♦ The sound system used in the front in combination with the
“ALPHA” or “BETA” radios consists of a 3-way system with a
bass loudspeaker in each door as well as one mid-range and
one treble loudspeaker each on the left and right in the dash
panel.
♦ The sound system used in the front in combination with the “R
110” or “GAMMA” radios consists of a 3-way system with a
bass loudspeaker in each door as well as one mid-range and
one treble loudspeaker each on the left and right in the dash
panel. Optional rear loudspeakers may be fitted.
♦ The front sound system used in combination with the “DELTA”
radio unit, the “radio/navigation system with monochrome dis‐
play” or “radio/navigation system 2” consists of a 3-way sys‐
tem with a bass loudspeaker in each door as well as one mid-
range and one treble loudspeaker each on the left and right in
the dash panel. In the rear of the vehicle, there is a 3-way
system on the left and right sides, each with a bass, a mid-
range and a treble loudspeaker.
♦ There are two versions of the dash panel, one padded and one
not padded. Systems with mid-range and treble loudspeakers
in the dash panel are installed in different ways.
♦ All loudspeakers are passive loudspeakers.

162 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

20.1.2 Sound system - vehicles as of 06.07 (not


for vehicles as of model year 2010)
On vehicles from 06.07, wide-band loudspeakers are installed on
some vehicles or radio combinations. Therefore, no treble loud‐
speakers are fitted in the dash panel and in the rear left side panel.
For additional information refer to table below:
Vehicle Loudspeaker “RNS Low Radio/navigation RCD 200 RCD 200 R 110 Radio prep‐
model system End” radio/ system “RNS 2- with MP3 aration
navigation CD” and radio/
system with navigation sys‐
mono‐ tem “RNS 2-
chrome dis‐ DVD”
play
Van 2-way system
4 loudspeak‐
ers
Van 2-way system
8 loudspeak‐
ers
Van Broadband X X X X X X
2 loudspeak‐
ers
Kombi 2-way system
4 loudspeak‐
ers
Kombi 2-way system
8 loudspeak‐
ers
Kombi Broadband X X X X X X
2 loudspeak‐
ers
Open body 2-way system
4 loudspeak‐
ers
Open body 2-way system
8 loudspeak‐
ers
Open body Broadband X X X X X X
2 loudspeak‐
ers
Multivan 2-way system X X X X
Beach 4 loudspeak‐
ers
Multivan 2-way system
Beach 8 loudspeak‐
ers
Multivan Broadband X X
Beach 2 loudspeak‐
ers
Shuttle 2-way system X X X X
4 loudspeak‐
ers
Shuttle 2-way system
8 loudspeak‐
ers
Shuttle Broadband X X
2 loudspeak‐
ers

20. Sound system 163


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Vehicle Loudspeaker “RNS Low Radio/navigation RCD 200 RCD 200 R 110 Radio prep‐
model system End” radio/ system “RNS 2- with MP3 aration
navigation CD” and radio/
system with navigation sys‐
mono‐ tem “RNS 2-
chrome dis‐ DVD”
play
Caravelle 2-way system X X
4 loudspeak‐
ers
Caravelle 2-way system X X X X
8 loudspeak‐
ers
Caravelle Broadband X
2 loudspeak‐
ers
Camper 2-way system X X
“TL” 4 loudspeak‐
ers
Camper 2-way system X X X
“TL” 8 loudspeak‐
ers
Camper Broadband X X
“TL” 2 loudspeak‐
ers

20.2 Removing and installing front mid-range


and treble loudspeakers
⇒ “20.2.1 Removing and installing front mid-range and treble
loudspeakers, vehicles with padded dash panel”, page 164
⇒ “20.2.2 Removing and installing front mid-range and treble
loudspeakers, vehicles without padded dash panel”, page 166

20.2.1 Removing and installing front mid-range


and treble loudspeakers, vehicles with
padded dash panel

Note

♦ Removal and installation is performed in the same manner on


the left and right sides.
♦ Mid-range and treble loudspeakers are installed on the left and
right in the dash panel.

Special tools and workshop equipment required

164 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

♦ Release lever - T10039/1-

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Using release lever - T10039/1- , carefully lever out loud‐
speaker trim at the points marked by -arrows-.

– Unscrew securing bolts -arrows- from loudspeaker.

– Guide loudspeaker connector -arrow- out of dash panel.

20. Sound system 165


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Release and disconnect connector on loudspeaker -arrows-.


– Remove loudspeaker.

Note

The mid-range and treble loudspeakers on each side are de‐


signed as a single component. If one loudspeaker is defective,
the component with mid-range and treble loudspeakers must be
renewed.

Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

20.2.2 Removing and installing front mid-range


and treble loudspeakers, vehicles with‐
out padded dash panel

Note

♦ Removal and installation is performed in the same manner on


the left and right sides.
♦ Mid-range and treble loudspeakers are installed on the left and
right in the dash panel.

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Release lever - T10039/1-

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Using release lever - T10039/1- , carefully lever out loud‐
speaker trim at the points marked by -arrows-.

166 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Unscrew securing bolts -arrows- from loudspeaker and pull


loudspeaker out of retaining tab -A-.
– Guide loudspeaker connector out of dash panel.

– Release and disconnect connector on loudspeaker -arrows-.


– Remove loudspeaker.

Note

The mid-range and treble loudspeakers on each side are de‐


signed as a single component. If one loudspeaker is defective,
the component with mid-range and treble loudspeakers must be
renewed.

Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

– Guide loudspeaker cover into mountings -arrows- and press


in retaining clip -A- until it engages.

20.3 Removing and installing rear mid-range


and treble loudspeakers

Note

♦ Removal and installation is performed in the same manner on


the left and right sides.
♦ Mid-range and treble loudspeakers are installed in the left and
right rear side panel trims.

Special tools and workshop equipment required

20. Sound system 167


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

♦ Release lever - T10039/1-

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove rear side trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 70 ; Trims, interior;
– Release and disconnect connector -arrows-.

– Unscrew securing bolts -arrows- and remove loudspeaker.

Note

The mid-range and treble loudspeakers on each side are de‐


signed as a single component. If one loudspeaker is defective,
the component with mid-range and treble loudspeakers must be
renewed.

Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

20.4 Removing and installing front bass loud‐


speakers

Note

♦ Removal and installation is performed in the same manner on


the left and right sides.
♦ The front bass loudspeakers are fitted in the front doors on
both sides.

Special tools and workshop equipment required

168 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

♦ Release lever - T10039/1-

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove door trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr.
70 ; Front door trims; Removing and installing front door trim
on driver side or ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr.
70 ; Front door trims; Removing and installing front door trim
on front passenger side .
– Release and disconnect connector -arrows-.

– Drill out rivets -arrows- with a suitable drill bit and take out
loudspeaker.

Caution

Risk of corrosion!
The swarf produced when drilling out the pop rivets may cause
corrosion.
Remove all swarf from the door and immediately rectify any
paintwork damage caused when drilling out the pop rivets.

Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– When installing new loudspeaker, secure it with special pop
rivets (note part number).

20. Sound system 169


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

20.5 Removing and installing rear bass loud‐


speakers

Note

♦ Removal and installation is performed in the same manner on


the left and right sides.
♦ Bass loudspeakers are installed in the left and right rear side
panel trims.

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Release lever - T10039/1-

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove rear side trim panel ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 70 ; Trims, interior .
– Release and disconnect connector -arrows-.

– Unscrew the 4 securing bolts -arrows- and remove loudspeak‐


er.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

170 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

20.6 Removing and installing rear loudspeak‐


ers in Camper
In the Camper version of the Transporter, rear loudspeakers are
installed in rear storage compartment -arrows-.
The rear loudspeakers on each side consist of a bass loudspeak‐
er as well as a system with a mid-range and treble loudspeaker.
Mid-range and treble loudspeakers are installed on the left and
right in the dash panel.
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Open rear storage compartment.

– Use a suitable tool to lever glued loudspeaker cover off care‐


fully -arrows-.

– Use a suitable tool to lever glued loudspeaker cover of mid-


range and treble loudspeaker off carefully -arrows-.
Removing bass loudspeaker:

– Remove securing bolts -arrows- and release and disconnect


connector -A-.
– Remove bass loudspeaker.
Installing bass loudspeaker:
Install the bass loudspeaker in reverse order of removal.

Note

When inserting loudspeaker covers, take care that loudspeaker


cables are routed correctly.

Removing mid-range and treble loudspeaker:

20. Sound system 171


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Remove securing bolts -arrows- and release and disconnect


connector.
– Remove mid-range and treble loudspeaker.
Installing mid-range and treble loudspeaker:

– Insert the plastic spacer sleeves properly -arrow-.


– Secure loudspeaker with the 3 securing bolts and connect and
engage connector -A-.

Note

When inserting loudspeaker covers, take care that loudspeaker


cables are routed correctly.

172 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

21 Sound system amplifier


⇒ “21.1 General description - sound system amplifier”,
page 173
⇒ “21.2 System overview - sound system amplifier, vehicles up to
model year 2009”, page 174
⇒ “21.3 System overview - sound system amplifier, vehicles as of
model year 2010”, page 174
⇒ “21.4 Removing and installing amplifier for sound system”, page
177
⇒ “21.5 Connector pin assignment - sound system amplifier”,
page 179

21.1 General description - sound system am‐


plifier
The sound system amplifier extends the sound range of normal
radios or radio/navigation systems.
It is available as optional equipment for appropriate radios and
radio/navigation systems.
The 8-channel amplifier is controlled via the radio or radio/navi‐
gation system using analogue technology.
The 12-channel amplifier is controlled via the radio unit or radio/
navigation system with the aid of the CAN bus using digital tech‐
nology.
The 8-channel amplifier is available as optional equipment with
the “RNS 2-CD” or “RNS 2-DVD” radio navigation systems and
the “DELTA” radio if the vehicle is equipped with the “digital voice
enhancement” (DVE) system.
The 8-channel amplifier is available as optional equipment with
the “DELTA” radio as well if the “digital voice enhancement” sys‐
tem is not installed.
The 12-channel amplifier is available as optional equipment with
the “RNS 2-CD” or “RNS 2-DVD” radio navigation system if the
“digital voice enhancement” system is not installed.
The 12-channel amplifier is no more installed as of model year
2007.
The amplifier is installed under the front right seat.
Removing and installing sound system amplifier ⇒ page 177 .

Note

♦ When dealing with complaints, it is absolutely necessary to


understand the function and the operation of the radio or the
radio navigation system.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Operating instructions
♦ In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the ⇒ vehicle
diagnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode ⇒ Current
flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
♦ When the battery is reconnected, check the items of equip‐
ment in the vehicle (radio, clock, convenience electronics etc.)
with reference to the workshop manual and/or operating in‐
structions and adjust them if necessary.

21. Sound system amplifier 173


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

21.2 System overview - sound system amplifier, vehicles up to model year 2009

1 - Amplifier output stage for


front left loudspeaker
2 - Amplifier output stage for
front right loudspeaker
3 - Front right treble loud‐
speaker
4 - Mid-range loudspeaker,
front right
5 - Bass loudspeaker, front
right
6 - Complete amplifier, pin as‐
signment for 8-channel ampli‐
fier ⇒ page 179 and for 12-
channel amplifier ⇒ page 181
7 - Source mixing (loudness,
balance, fade, treble, mid-
range and bass)
8 - Treble loudspeaker, rear
right
9 - Mid-range loudspeaker,
rear right
10 - Bass loudspeaker, rear
right
11 - Amplifier output stage for
rear right loudspeaker
12 - Bass loudspeaker (sub‐
woofer)
13 - Amplifier output stage for
rear left loudspeaker
14 - Bass loudspeaker, rear left
15 - Mid-range loudspeaker,
rear left
16 - Treble loudspeaker, rear left
17 - CAN bus (only for self-diagnosis)
18 - Mono input, navigation (speech)
19 - Telephone/speech dialogue
20 - Stereo input, right
21 - Stereo input, left
22 - Radio or radio navigation system
23 - Bass loudspeaker, front left
24 - Mid-range loudspeaker, front left
25 - Front left treble loudspeaker

21.3 System overview - sound system ampli‐


fier, vehicles as of model year 2010
System overview of 2- and 4-channel sound system amplifiers

174 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Front left mid-range and tre‐


ble loudspeaker - R26-
2 - Front right mid-range and
treble loudspeaker - R27-
3 - Bass loudspeaker, front
right - R23-
4 - Bass loudspeaker, rear
right - R17-
5 - Treble loudspeaker, rear
right - R16-
6 - Radio - R- or control unit
with display for radio and nav‐
igation - J503-
7 - Treble loudspeaker, rear
left - R14-
8 - Bass loudspeaker, rear left
- R15-
9 - CAN bus
10 - Bass loudspeaker, front
left - R21-

System overview of 8-channel sound system amplifier

21. Sound system amplifier 175


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Front left mid-range and tre‐


ble loudspeaker - R26-
2 - Amplifier - R12-
3 - Front right mid-range and
treble loudspeaker - R27-
4 - Bass loudspeaker, front
right - R23-
5 - Bass loudspeaker, rear
right - R17-
6 - Treble loudspeaker, rear
right - R16-
7 - Stereo audio signal inputs
from radio or radio/navigation
system
8 - Radio - R- or control unit
with display for radio and nav‐
igation - J503-
9 - CAN bus
10 - Treble loudspeaker, rear
left - R14-
11 - Bass loudspeaker, rear left
- R15-
12 - Bass loudspeaker, front
left - R21-

System overview of 10-channel sound system amplifier “Dynau‐


dio”

176 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Front left treble loudspeaker


- R20-
2 - Amplifier - R12-
3 - Front right treble loud‐
speaker - R22-
4 - Mid-range loudspeaker,
front right - R104-
5 - Bass loudspeaker, front
right - R23-
6 - Bass loudspeaker, rear
right - R17-
7 - Treble loudspeaker, rear
right - R16-
8 - Stereo audio signal inputs
from radio or radio/navigation
system
9 - Radio - R- or control unit
with display for radio and nav‐
igation - J503-
10 - CAN bus
11 - Treble loudspeaker, rear
left - R14-
12 - Bass loudspeaker, rear left
- R15-
13 - Bass loudspeaker, front
left - R21-
14 - Mid-range loudspeaker,
front left - R103-

21.4 Removing and installing amplifier for


sound system
The sound system amplifier is installed under the right front seat.
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove right front seat ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 72 ; Front seats; Removing and installing front seat .

21. Sound system amplifier 177


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Remove securing bolts -arrows-.


– Remove amplifier as far as the connected wiring allows.

– Release and disconnect connectors on amplifier -arrows-.


Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

178 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

21.5 Connector pin assignment - sound sys‐


tem amplifier
⇒ “21.5.1 Connector pin assignment - 8-channel amplifier”, page
179
⇒ “21.5.2 Connector pin assignment - 12-channel amplifier”, page
181

21.5.1 Connector pin assignment - 8-channel


amplifier
Multi-pin connector A, 24-pin
1 - Rear left treble loudspeaker, positive
2 - Rear right mid-range loudspeaker, negative
3 - Rear right mid-range loudspeaker, positive
4 - Rear left mid-range loudspeaker, positive
5 - Rear right treble loudspeaker, negative
6 - Rear right treble loudspeaker, positive
7 - Rear left treble loudspeaker, negative
8 - Bass loudspeaker (subwoofer), positive
9 - Bass loudspeaker (subwoofer), negative
10 - Rear left mid-range loudspeaker, negative
11 - Not assigned
12 - Not assigned
13 - Not assigned
14 - Audio input signal, rear left, negative
15 - Audio input signal, rear left, positive
16 - Not assigned
17 - Audio input signal, rear right, negative
18 - Audio input signal, rear right, positive
19 - Amplifier control wire input, positive
20 - Audio input signal, front left, negative
21 - Audio input signal, front left, positive
22 - Not assigned
23 - Audio input signal, front right, negative
24 - Audio input signal, front right, positive

21. Sound system amplifier 179


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector B, 23-pin


1 - CAN bus, Low
2 - Front left bass loudspeaker, negative
3 - Front left bass loudspeaker, positive
4 - CAN bus, high
5 - Not assigned
6 - Front left mid-range loudspeaker, positive
7 - Not assigned
8 - Not assigned
9 - Front left mid-range loudspeaker, negative
10 - Not assigned
11 - Front left bass loudspeaker, positive
12 - Front left bass loudspeaker, negative
13 - Not assigned
14 - Not assigned
15 - Front right mid-range loudspeaker, negative
16 - Audio input signal, negative
17 - Not assigned
18 - Front right mid-range loudspeaker, positive
19 - Terminal 31 voltage supply, negative
20 - Terminal 30 voltage supply, positive
21 - Terminal 30 voltage supply, positive
22 - Terminal 31 voltage supply, negative
23 - Terminal 30 voltage supply, positive

180 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

21.5.2 Connector pin assignment - 12-channel


amplifier
Multi-pin connector A, 24-pin
1 - Rear left bass loudspeaker, positive
2 - Rear left bass loudspeaker, negative
3 - Rear right bass loudspeaker, positive
4 - Rear right mid-range loudspeaker, negative
5 - Rear right mid-range loudspeaker, positive
6 - Rear right bass loudspeaker, negative
7 - Rear left mid-range loudspeaker, negative
8 - Rear left mid-range loudspeaker, positive
9 - Mid-range/treble loudspeaker, front left, negative
10 - Audio input signal, left, positive
11 - Audio input signal, right, positive
12 - Mid-range/treble loudspeaker, front left, positive
13 - Audio input signal, negative
14 - Navigation audio input signal, negative
15 - Mid-range/treble loudspeaker, front right, negative
16 - CAN bus, high
17 - Navigation audio input signal, positive
18 - Mid-range/treble loudspeaker, front right, positive
19 - CAN bus, Low
20 - Telephone input signal, positive
21 - Not assigned
22 - Not assigned
23 - Not assigned
24 - Not assigned

21. Sound system amplifier 181


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector B, 23-pin


1 - Not assigned
2 - Not assigned
3 - Bass loudspeaker (subwoofer), negative
4 - Not assigned
5 - Telephone audio input signal, negative
6 - Bass loudspeaker (subwoofer), positive
7 - Not assigned
8 - Not assigned
9 - Front right bass loudspeaker, positive
10 - Not assigned
11 - Not assigned
12 - Front right bass loudspeaker, negative
13 - Not assigned
14 - Not assigned
15 - Front left bass loudspeaker, positive
16 - Negative, terminal 31
17 - Not assigned
18 - Front left bass loudspeaker, negative
19 - Terminal 31 voltage supply, negative
20 - Terminal 30 voltage supply, positive
21 - Terminal 30 voltage supply, positive
22 - Terminal 31 voltage supply, negative
23 - Terminal 30 voltage supply, positive

182 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

22 Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)


⇒ “22.1 Components of Rear Seat Entertainment system”,
page 183
⇒ “22.2 Overview of fitting locations – Rear Seat Entertainment
system”, page 184
⇒ “22.3 Removing and installing Rear Seat Entertainment sys‐
tem”, page 184
⇒ “22.4 Removing and installing interior light bulb”, page 185
⇒ “22.5 Changing batteries in headphones”, page 186
⇒ “22.6 Changing batteries in remote control”, page 187
⇒ “22.7 Pin assignment – Rear Seat Entertainment system”, page
188
⇒ “22.8 Fuse assignment - rear seat entertainment system”, page
189

22.1 Components of Rear Seat Entertain‐


ment system
The Rear Seat Entertainment system is located behind the first
row of seats where it is bolted to a bracket under the moulded
headliner of the vehicle. The system consists of the following
components:
10.2 inch TFT LCD monitor
♦ Colour display of type 16:9
♦ Resolution: 800x600 pixels
♦ Retractable
♦ Swivel-mounted, to left: approx. 220°, to right: approx. 90°
Integrated DVD player
♦ CD/DVD slot on side of device
♦ Formats supported: DVD, VCD, audio CD, CD-R, CD-RW,
MP3, WMA, JPEG, DVD-R/-RW/+R/+RW
♦ On Screen Display
♦ Controlled via device buttons with red background lighting, or
via infrared remote control
♦ Video input on back of unit (RCA yellow)
♦ Audio-L (RCA white) and Audio-R (RCA red) inputs on back
of unit
Infrared remote control
♦ For convenient control of Rear Seat Entertainment system
2 wireless infrared headphones
♦ For convenient stereo sound output
♦ Weight per headphone: approx. 240 g
Switchable interior lights
♦ 4 integrated, switchable roof lights
The Rear Seat Entertainment system has no connection to the
sound system of the vehicle.
The Rear Seat Entertainment system only works if the tempera‐
ture in the vehicle interior is between -15°C (+5°F) and +60°C

22. Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) 183


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

(+140°F). In the case of a lower or higher temperature, the system


cannot be operated and will switch off automatically if already
running.
For additional information, refer to respective ⇒ Operating Man‐
ual .
Fault detection and fault display:
The Rear Seat Entertainment system is not capable of self-diag‐
nosis.

22.2 Overview of fitting locations – Rear Seat Entertainment system

1 - Rear Seat Entertainment


❑ Fitting location: in moul‐
ded headliner, behind
first row of seats
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 184
❑ Removing and installing
interior light bulb
⇒ page 185
❑ Interior light bulb: 12 V,
3 Watt festoon bulb
❑ Connector pin assign‐
ment ⇒ page 188 .
❑ Fuse assignment
⇒ page 189
2 - Infrared remote control
❑ Battery: 1 x 3 Volt, type
»CR2025«
❑ Changing batteries
⇒ page 187
❑ For remote control func‐
tions, refer to ⇒ Operat‐
ing Manual
3 - Infrared headphones
❑ Qty. 2
❑ Batteries: 2 x 1.5 Volt,
type micro »AAA«
❑ Changing batteries
⇒ page 186
❑ For headphone func‐
tions, refer to ⇒ Operat‐
ing Manual

22.3 Removing and installing Rear Seat En‐


tertainment system

Note

The Rear Seat Entertainment system is installed in the headliner


behind the first row of seats.

184 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Removing
– Switch off Rear Seat Entertainment system.
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Fold out monitor -1- to gain access to securing bolts.
– Unscrew securing bolts (qty. 4) -arrows-, and carefully remove
Rear Seat Entertainment system -2- from headliner.

– Disconnect connector -2-, and remove Rear Seat Entertain‐


ment system -1-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

22.4 Removing and installing interior light


bulb
The Rear Seat Entertainment system is equipped with 4 switch‐
able interior lights.
Removing
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Switch off interior lights on switch near CD slot.
– Unscrew securing bolt -arrow- of relevant interior light, and
remove lens -1- from housing -2-.

22. Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) 185


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Pull festoon bulb -2- out of contacts in housing -1-.


Interior light bulb: 12 V, 3 Watt festoon bulb
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

22.5 Changing batteries in headphones


Each of the infrared headphones is equipped with two 1.5 Volt
batteries of type micro »AAA«. If there is no playback of audio
signals via the headphones, then the batteries are empty and
need to be renewed.

Note

The infrared headphones will switch off automatically after 3 to


5 minutes if no infrared signal is received.

Caution

If the batteries are not renewed properly, the headphones may


become damaged.
Unsuitable batteries can damage the headphones. Replace
empty batteries only with new batteries of the same voltage
rating, the same size and the same specifications.
Make sure to properly insert the batteries (polarity) when in‐
stalling.

Removing
– Switch off headphones.
– Press catch on battery cover -2-, and pull cover in
-direction of arrow- off headphone -1-.

186 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Remove empty batteries from battery compartment in head‐


phone -1-.
Installing

– Insert new batteries into headphone -1-, and observe polarity


while doing so.
– Fit battery cover -2-, and push it upwards until it is securely
engaged in headphone -1-.

22.6 Changing batteries in remote control


The remote control is equipped with a 3 Volt battery of type
»CR2025«. If the remote control does not respond to the push of
a button, then the battery is empty and needs to be renewed.

Caution

If the battery is not renewed properly, the remote control may


become damaged.
Unsuitable batteries can damage the remote control. Replace
the empty battery only with a new battery of the same voltage
rating, the same size and the same specifications.
Make sure to properly insert the battery (noting correct polarity)
when installing.

– Slide open battery compartment on back of remote control


-a-.
– Remove empty battery, and insert new battery noting polarity
-+- -b-.
– Close battery compartment, and engage it firmly -c-.

22. Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) 187


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

22.7 Pin assignment – Rear Seat Entertain‐


ment system
Multi-pin connector, 20-pin

Note

The illustration shows the rear side of the connector. Note the
labelling of chambers on the connector housing.

1 - Not assigned
2 - Earth (black)
3 - Video earth OUT (black)
4 - Not assigned
5 - Not assigned
6 - Audio earth OUT (green)
7 - Audio earth IN (green)
8 - Not assigned
9 - Video earth IN (black)
10 - Not assigned
11 - Terminal 30 (yellow)
12 - Radio switch positive (red), if no S-contact (terminal 86S red)
13 - Video signal OUT (white)
14 - Audio left OUT (yellow)
15 - Audio right OUT (red)
16 - Not assigned
17 - Audio right IN (red)
18 - Audio left IN (yellow)
19 - Video signal IN (white)
20 - Not assigned

188 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

22.8 Fuse assignment - rear seat entertain‐


ment system
Fuse assignment of Rear Seat Entertainment system in fuse
holder F-SF in seat box under driver seat:
N Designation as per Nomi Function/components Ter‐
o current flow diagram nal minal
. val‐
ue
1 Fuse 19 in fuse hold‐ 30 A Current supply in driver 30
9 er F -SF19- 1) seat storage compart‐
ment
1 Fuse 16 in fuse hold‐ 30 A Current supply in driver 30
6 er F -SF16- 1) seat storage compart‐
ment
1) Depending on equipment level, when the fuse SF19 is fitted, the fuse SF16 is
used for the current supply to the Rear Seat Entertainment system.

Note additional information on the fitting locations for Multivan and


Business ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fit‐
ting locations.

Fuse assignment of Rear Seat Entertainment system in fuse


holder for special vehicles in storage compartment under front
passenger seat:
No. Designation Nomi Function/components Ter‐
nal minal
val‐
ue
-Fuse locationFuse
2- 1 (top) Not assigned
-Fuse locationFuse
2- 2 (cen‐ 3 A Rear Seat Entertain‐ 30
tre) ment
-Fuse locationFuse
2- 3 (bot‐ 3 A Current supply in front Radio
tom) 2) passenger seat storage switc
compartment h
posi‐
tive
2) Depending on the equipment level, fuse 3 is supplied with current only if the
radio is switched on, or if the ignition key is inserted.

22. Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) 189


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

23 “Digital voice enhancement” system


(DVE), vehicles up to model year
2009
⇒ “23.1 General description - digital voice enhancement system”,
page 190
⇒ “23.2 Fitting location overview - digital voice enhancement sys‐
tem”, page 193
⇒ “23.3 Removing and installing digital voice enhancement con‐
trol unit ”, page 194
⇒ “23.4 Connector pin assignment - digital voice enhancement
control unit ”, page 196
⇒ “23.5 Removing and installing digital voice enhancement mi‐
crophone”, page 197
⇒ “23.6 Coding digital voice enhancement control unit”,
page 198

23.1 General description - “digital voice en‐


hancement” system

Note

♦ When faced with complaints, it is absolutely necessary to be


familiar with the function and operation of the “digital voice
enhancement” system (DVE).
♦ Additional information ⇒ Operating manual
♦ In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the ⇒ vehicle
diagnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode ⇒ Current
flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
♦ When the battery is reconnected, check the items of equip‐
ment in the vehicle (radio, clock, convenience electronics etc.)
with reference to the workshop manual and/or operating in‐
structions and adjust them if necessary.

The “digital voice enhancement” system consists of the digital


voice enhancement control unit, 6 microphones in the roof head‐
liner as well as a fader in the switch rail in the centre console.
The “digital voice enhancement” system is used to enable the ve‐
hicle occupants to understand one another's voices and that of
telephone callers even when there is a high ambient noise level
and a large distance between the occupants and/or the tele‐
phone. To this end, 6 microphones are installed in the vehicle
headlining and record the voice signals of the occupants. The
voice signals are reproduced using the same loudspeakers as the
radio. Driving noise is filtered out prior to reproduction in order to
improve clarity.
The “digital voice enhancement” system is built into the signal
path between the radio and amplifier. The mobile telephone op‐
erating electronics control unit - J412- , in contrast to an audio
system without “digital voice enhancement”, is not connected to
the radio but to the “digital voice enhancement” system.

190 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Note

The “digital voice enhancement” system is available only in con‐


junction with the “DELTA” radio or the “radio navigation system
2” with multifunction display (MFD). The 8-channel amplifier is al‐
ways installed in these units in combination with the “digital voice
enhancement” system.

The “digital voice enhancement” system functions in all telephone


and radio operating modes. To facilitate understanding, a table is
shown below in which you can see which systems are switched
on or off in which operating modes and how the corresponding
functional sequences are arranged.
Description of device status for “digital voice enhancement” sys‐
tem:
Funktion: - Switching DVE function on/off (switch on micro‐
phones, mixing voice signals, etc.)
Bedienungselement: - Fader for DVE
Einschaltbedingungen: - Terminal 15 on and fader for DVE set to
a value greater than “0”.
Ausschaltbedingungen: - Terminal 15 off or fader for DVE set to
“0”.
Operating status Device status
♦ No telephone call and ♦ No microphone is active.
♦ Radio switched off and ♦ Telephone operating electronic control unit is in idle condition.
♦ DVE switched off ♦ Radio is not outputting audio signals.
♦ DVE is not outputting signals.
♦ No output of signals to loudspeakers.

♦ No telephone call and ♦ All microphones are active.


♦ Radio switched off and ♦ Telephone operating electronic control unit is in idle condition.
♦ DVE switched on ♦ Radio is not outputting audio signals.
♦ The DVE system processes the voice signals from the microphones
and then sends them to selected input channels of the amplifier. The
microphone signals from the front go to the input channel of the am‐
plifier for the left and right rear. The microphone signals from the rear
go to the input channel of the amplifier for the left and right front. The
microphone signals from the middle go to the input channels of the
amplifier for the left and right front and rear.
♦ Output of microphone signals to the specified loudspeakers.

♦ No telephone call and ♦ No microphone is active.


♦ radio switched on and ♦ Telephone operating electronic control unit is in idle condition.
♦ DVE switched off ♦ The radio outputs audio signals to the DVE control unit.
♦ DVE sends the audio signal of the radio on to all input channels of
the amplifier.
♦ Output of audio signals of the radio to all loudspeakers.

23. “Digital voice enhancement” system (DVE), vehicles up to model year 2009 191
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Operating status Device status


♦ No telephone call and ♦ All microphones are active.
♦ radio switched on and ♦ Telephone operating electronic control unit is in idle condition.
♦ DVE switched on ♦ The radio outputs audio signals to the DVE control unit.
♦ The DVE system processes the voice signals from the microphones
and then sends them to selected input channels of the amplifier. The
microphone signals from the front go to the input channel of the am‐
plifier for the left and right rear. The microphone signals from the rear
go to the input channel of the amplifier for the left and right front. The
microphone signals from the middle go to the input channels of the
amplifier for the left and right front and rear. DVE sends the audio
signal of the radio on to all input channels of the amplifier.
♦ Output of microphone signals to the specified loudspeakers. Output
of audio signals of the radio to all loudspeakers.

♦ Telephone call and ♦ Only the driver microphone is active.


♦ Radio switched off and ♦ The control unit for the telephone operating electronics triggers the
mute function in the radio. At the same time, it passes the telephone
♦ DVE switched off input signal on to the DVE control unit.
♦ Radio is not outputting audio signals. The radio returns the telephone
input signal to the digital voice enhancement control unit.
♦ The DVE forwards the telephone input signal coming from the mobile
telephone operating electronics control unit on to the radio. The DVE
sends the telephone input signal coming from the radio on to the am‐
plifier and then on to the loudspeakers. The DVE sends the voice
signals of the driver's microphone on to the telephone operating elec‐
tronic control unit.
♦ Output of the telephone input signal to the loudspeakers determined
by the radio (depending on the balance and fader settings).

♦ Telephone call and ♦ All microphones are active.


♦ Radio switched off and ♦ The control unit for the telephone operating electronics triggers the
mute function in the radio. At the same time, it passes the telephone
♦ DVE switched on input signal on to the DVE control unit.
♦ Radio is not outputting audio signals. The radio returns the telephone
input signal to the digital voice enhancement control unit.
♦ The DVE system processes the voice signals from the microphones
and then sends them to selected input channels of the amplifier. The
microphone signals from the front go to the input channel of the am‐
plifier for the left and right rear. The microphone signals from the rear
go to the input channel of the amplifier for the left and right front. The
microphone signals from the middle go to the input channels of the
amplifier for the left and right front and rear. DVE sends the telephone
input signal to all input channels of the amplifier.
♦ Output of microphone signals to the specified loudspeakers. Output
of telephone input signal to all loudspeakers.

192 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Operating status Device status


♦ Telephone call and ♦ Only the driver microphone is active.
♦ radio switched on and ♦ The control unit for the telephone operating electronics triggers the
mute function in the radio. At the same time, it passes the telephone
♦ DVE switched off input signal on to the DVE control unit.
♦ Radio is not outputting audio signals. The radio returns the telephone
input signal to the digital voice enhancement control unit.
♦ The DVE forwards the telephone input signal coming from the mobile
telephone operating electronics control unit on to the radio. The DVE
sends the telephone input signal coming from the radio on to the am‐
plifier and then on to the loudspeakers. The DVE sends the voice
signals of the driver's microphone on to the telephone operating elec‐
tronic control unit.
♦ Output of the telephone input signal to the loudspeakers determined
by the radio (depending on the balance and fader settings).

♦ Telephone call and ♦ All microphones are active.


♦ radio switched on and ♦ The control unit for the telephone operating electronics triggers the
mute function in the radio. At the same time, it passes the telephone
♦ DVE switched on input signal on to the DVE control unit.
♦ Radio is not outputting audio signals. The radio returns the telephone
input signal to the digital voice enhancement control unit.
♦ The DVE system processes the voice signals from the microphones
and then sends them to selected input channels of the amplifier. The
microphone signals from the front go to the input channel of the am‐
plifier for the left and right rear. The microphone signals from the rear
go to the input channel of the amplifier for the left and right front. The
microphone signals from the middle go to the input channels of the
amplifier for the left and right front and rear. DVE sends the telephone
input signal to all input channels of the amplifier.
♦ Output of microphone signals to the specified loudspeakers. Output
of telephone input signal to all loudspeakers.

Fault detection and fault display:


The “digital voice enhancement” system is equipped with self-di‐
agnosis.
In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the vehicle di‐
agnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode.

23.2 Fitting location overview - “digital voice enhancement” system

23. “Digital voice enhancement” system (DVE), vehicles up to model year 2009 193
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Telephone operating elec‐


tronics control unit - J412-
❑ Installed under glove
compartment.
2 - Sound system amplifier -
R12-
❑ Installed under right
front seat.
3 - Voice enhancement control
unit - J656-
❑ Installed under right
front seat.
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 194
4 - Mobile phone - R54-
5 - Six microphones for voice
enhancement (R140 to R145)
❑ Installed in roof headlin‐
er, in each case in area
above seats.
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 197
6 - Loudspeaker systems, rear
left and right
❑ Installed in rear side
panel trims.
❑ Rear left bass loud‐
speaker - R15- and rear
right bass loudspeaker -
R17-
❑ Rear left mid-range
loudspeaker - R105-
and rear right mid-range
loudspeaker - R106-
❑ Rear right treble loudspeaker - R14- and rear left treble loudspeaker - R16-
7 - Front left bass loudspeaker - R21- and front right bass loudspeaker - R23-
8 - Loudspeaker systems in dash panel
❑ Mid-range loudspeaker, front left - R103-
❑ Mid-range loudspeaker, front right - R104-
❑ Front left treble loudspeaker - R20-
9 - “Radio/navigation system 2” with MFD or “DELTA” radio
10 - Fader - R6-
❑ Fitting location: in centre console
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 96 ; Lights, bulbs, switches - interior; Lights and
switches in dash panel; Removing and installing switches in centre of dash panel .

23.3 Removing and installing “digital voice


enhancement control unit”
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Move right front seat to the foremost position.

194 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Remove cover on rear of seat frame -arrow-.

– Unfasten connector -arrow- and disconnect.

– Unscrew upper securing bolt -arrow-.

– Unscrew lower securing bolt -arrow-.


– Remove digital voice enhancement control unit - J656- .

23. “Digital voice enhancement” system (DVE), vehicles up to model year 2009 195
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Release and disconnect connectors on control unit -arrows-.


Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

23.4 Connector pin assignment - “digital


voice enhancement control unit”
Multi-pin connector A, 24-pin
1 - Amplifier control wire input, positive
2 - Audio output, rear left, positive
3 - Audio output, rear left, negative
4 - Not assigned
5 - Audio output, rear right, positive
6 - Audio output, rear right, negative
7 - Not assigned
8 - Audio output, front left, positive
9 - Audio output, front left, negative
10 - Volume control A
11 - Audio output, front right, positive
12 - Audio output, front right, negative
13 - Volume control B
14 - Audio input, rear left, positive
15 - Audio input, rear left, negative
16 - Not assigned
17 - Audio input, rear right, positive
18 - Audio input, rear right, negative
19 - Telephone audio signal, positive
20 - Audio input, front left, positive
21 - Audio input, front left, negative
22 - Telephone audio signal, negative
23 - Audio input, front right, positive
24 - Audio input, front right, negative

196 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Multi-pin connector B, 23-pin


1 - Microphone 1, front left, positive
2 - Microphone 2, front right, positive
3 - Microphone 2, front right, negative
4 - Microphone 1, front left, negative
5 - Microphone 3, centre left, positive
6 - Microphone 3, centre left, negative
7 - Microphone 6, rear right, positive
8 - Microphone 4, centre right, positive
9 - Microphone 4, centre right, negative
10 - Microphone 6, rear right, negative
11 - Microphone 5, rear left, positive
12 - Microphone 5, rear left, negative
13 - Telephone receive, positive
14 - Telephone receive, negative
15 - Telephone transmit, positive
16 - CAN bus, high
17 - CAN bus, Low
18 - Telephone transmit, negative
19 - Terminal 31 voltage supply, negative
20 - Radio mute
21 - S-contact
22 - Terminal 31 voltage supply, negative
23 - Terminal 30 voltage supply, positive

23.5 Removing and installing “digital voice


enhancement” microphone
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Carefully unclip the microphone from the roof headliner
-arrow-.
– Pull microphone wiring out of roof until the connector becomes
accessible.

23. “Digital voice enhancement” system (DVE), vehicles up to model year 2009 197
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Release and disconnect microphone connector -arrow-.


Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Connect and engage microphone.
– Push microphone wire into roof headliner.

– Insert microphone into roof headliner and engage it -arrows-.

23.6 Coding “digital voice enhancement”


control unit
Adapting components for “digital voice enhancement”:
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Digital voice enhancement DVE
♦ Functions DVE

198 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

24 “Digital voice enhancement” system


(DVE), vehicles as of model year
2010
⇒ “24.1 General description - digital voice enhancement system”,
page 199
⇒ “24.2 Fitting location overview - digital voice enhancement sys‐
tem”, page 201
⇒ “24.4 Removing and installing digital voice enhancement con‐
trol unit ”, page 206
⇒ “24.3 System overview - digital voice enhancement system
(DVE)”, page 203
⇒ “24.5 Adapting digital voice enhancement microphones”, page
206

24.1 General description - “digital voice en‐


hancement” system

Note

♦ When faced with complaints, it is absolutely necessary to


know the functions of and how to operate the “digital voice
enhancement” (DVE).
♦ Additional information ⇒ Operating manual
♦ In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the ⇒ vehicle
diagnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode ⇒ Current
flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
♦ When the battery is reconnected, check the items of equip‐
ment in the vehicle (radio, clock, convenience electronics etc.)
with reference to the workshop manual and/or operating in‐
structions and adjust them if necessary.

The “digital voice enhancement” system consists of the digital


voice enhancement control unit, 6 microphones in the roof head‐
liner as well as a fader in the centre console.
The “digital voice enhancement” system is used to enable the ve‐
hicle occupants to understand one another's voices and that of
telephone callers. Even when there is a high ambient noise level
and a large distance between the occupants and/or the tele‐
phone. To this end, 6 microphones are installed in the vehicle
headlining and record the voice signals of the occupants. The
voice signals are reproduced using the same loudspeakers as the
radio. Driving noise is filtered out prior to reproduction in order to
improve clarity.

Note

The “digital voice enhancement” system is available only in com‐


bination with an 8- or 10-channel amplifier and additionally with a
radio or a radio navigation system.

In comparison with the previous system, the following points have


been improved thanks to modifications to components and the
software of the digital voice enhancement control unit:
♦ More natural voice reproduction
♦ Localisation of the source of the speaker

24. “Digital voice enhancement” system (DVE), vehicles as of model year 2010 199
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

♦ Increased system amplification (voice reproduction volume)


♦ Lower feedback tendency
♦ Combination of “DVE” and the “Dynaudio” sound system pos‐
sible
Notes on operation of “digital voice enhancement” system:
The control for the “digital voice enhancement” system is located
in the dash panel. It enables the system to be switched on and off
and system amplification between the microphones and loud‐
speakers to be set.
“Digital voice enhancement” system If the radio is switched off and no telephone call is being conducted, the
switched on via control: recorded voice signals are output via the vehicle's loudspeakers.
If the radio is switched on and no telephone call is being conducted, the
“digital voice enhancement” system mixes the vehicle occupants' voice
signals with the radio signals. It then outputs the mixed signal via the
sound amplifier and the vehicle's loudspeakers.
“Digital voice enhancement” system When switched off (control set to zero), the “digital voice enhancement”
switched off via control: system behaves in a transparent manner. Without further processing,
the radio signal is patched through to the amplifier by the “digital voice
enhancement” system and is output via the loudspeakers.
Telephone and “digital voice en‐ Interaction between the “digital voice enhancement” system and a uni‐
hancement” system: versal preparation for mobile telephone (UTP) is possible without diffi‐
culties. If a UTP is installed, the “digital voice enhancement” system
transmits a microphone signal to the telephone transmitter and receiver
unit. The voice signals from the telephone towards the vehicle occupants
are transferred from the UTP to the radio/navigation system. From there,
they are forwarded via the “digital voice enhancement” system and the
sound amplifier to the vehicle's loudspeakers.
“Digital voice enhancement” system The DVE can be used together with the RNS 510 radio/navigation sys‐
and voice control system in radio tem's Speech Operating System. Certain of the RNS 510's functions can
navigation system “RNS 510”: be controlled using spoken commands without distracting the user from
events on the road. The Speech Operating System is activated using a
button on the multifunction steering wheel and accepts the user's spoken
commands.
To ensure flawless reception of the spoken commands, a separate mi‐
crophone is connected to the RNS 510; this is only activated whilst a
command is being input. The microphone signal is disregarded by the
“digital voice enhancement” system.

Table with functions of “digital voice enhancement” system:


Function Controls Switch-on con‐ Switch-off con‐
ditions ditions
Activate DVE with ignition ♦ Switch on ♦ Switch off
control unit key via elec‐ terminal 15 terminal 15
tronic ignition or or
lock
♦ switch on ♦ switch off
radio or ra‐ radio or ra‐
dio/naviga‐ dio/naviga‐
tion system tion system

200 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Function Controls Switch-on con‐ Switch-off con‐


ditions ditions
Switch interior Control for the ♦ “Digital ♦ “Digital
communica‐ “digital voice voice en‐ voice en‐
tion on/off enhancement” hance‐ hance‐
(switch on mi‐ system ment” sys‐ ment” sys‐
crophones, tem activa‐ tem deacti‐
mixing voice ted and vated or
signals, etc.)
♦ rotary con‐ ♦ rotary con‐
trol set to a trol set to
value great‐ position 0
er than 0

Fault detection and fault display:


The “digital voice enhancement” system (DVE) is equipped with
self-diagnosis.
In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the vehicle di‐
agnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode.

24.2 Fitting location overview - “digital voice enhancement” system

1 - Sound system amplifier -


R12-
❑ Installed under right
front seat.
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Sound system
amplifier" ⇒ page 173 .
2 - Voice enhancement control
unit - J656-
❑ Installed under right
front seat.
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 194
3 - Radio - R- or control unit
with display for radio and nav‐
igation - J503-
4 - Six microphones for voice
enhancement (R140 to R145)
❑ Installed in roof headlin‐
er, in each case in area
above seats.
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 197
❑ Microphone adaptation
for voice amplification
⇒ page 206 .

24. “Digital voice enhancement” system (DVE), vehicles as of model year 2010 201
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

5 - Rear right bass loudspeaker - R17- , rear left bass loudspeaker - R15- , rear right treble loudspeaker - R16-
and rear left treble loudspeaker - R14-
6 - Front left bass loudspeaker - R21- and front right bass loudspeaker - R23-
7 - Fader - R6-
❑ Fitting location: in centre console
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 96 ; Lights and controls in dash panel; Removing
and installing switches in centre of dash panel .
8 - Front left mid-range and treble loudspeaker - R26- and front right mid-range and treble loudspeaker - R27-
9 - Telephone transmitter and receiver unit - R36-
❑ Installed under glove compartment.

202 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

24.3 System overview - “digital voice en‐


hancement” system (DVE)
⇒ “24.3.1 System overview - digital voice enhancement system
(DVE) without voice control system”, page 203
⇒ “24.3.2 System overview - digital voice enhancement system
(DVE) with voice control system”, page 205

24.3.1 System overview - “digital voice enhancement” system (DVE) without voice
control system

1 - Front left mid-range and tre‐


ble loudspeaker - R26-
2 - Sound system amplifier -
R12-
3 - Front right mid-range and
treble loudspeaker - R27-
4 - Bass loudspeaker, front
right - R23-
5 - Bass loudspeaker, rear
right - R17-
6 - Treble loudspeaker, rear
right - R16-
7 - Rear left microphone -
R144-
8 - Centre left microphone -
R142-
9 - Front left microphone -
R140-
10 - Front right microphone -
R141-
11 - Centre right microphone -
R143-
12 - Rear right microphone -
R145-
13 - Voice enhancement con‐
trol unit - J656-
14 - Fader - R6-
15 - Audio line connections
from radio - R- or control unit
with display for radio and nav‐
igation - J503- to voice ampli‐
fication control unit - J656-
16 - Radio - R- or control unit with display for radio and navigation - J503- without voice control
17 - LF line connection from telephone transmitter and receiver unit - R36- to radio - R- or control unit with
display for radio and navigation - J503-
18 - Telephone transmitter and receiver unit - R36-
19 - Line connection for microphone signal from digital voice enhancement control unit - J656- to telephone
transmitter and receiver unit - R36-
20 - CAN bus
❑ Convenience CAN bus in the case of combined gateway/onboard supply control unit
❑ Infotainment CAN bus in the case of separate gateway/onboard supply control unit

24. “Digital voice enhancement” system (DVE), vehicles as of model year 2010 203
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

21 - Audio line connections from digital voice enhancement control unit - J656- to sound system amplifier - R12-
22 - Treble loudspeaker, rear left - R14-
23 - Bass loudspeaker, rear left - R15-
24 - Bass loudspeaker, front left - R21-

204 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

24.3.2 System overview - “digital voice enhancement” system (DVE) with voice
control system

1 - Front left mid-range and tre‐


ble loudspeaker - R26-
2 - Sound system amplifier -
R12-
3 - Front right mid-range and
treble loudspeaker - R27-
4 - Bass loudspeaker, front
right - R23-
5 - Bass loudspeaker, rear
right - R17-
6 - Treble loudspeaker, rear
right - R16-
7 - Rear left microphone -
R144-
8 - Centre left microphone -
R142-
9 - Front left microphone -
R140-
10 - Front right microphone -
R141-
11 - Centre right microphone -
R143-
12 - Rear right microphone -
R145-
13 - Voice enhancement con‐
trol unit - J656-
14 - Fader - R6-
15 - Audio line connections
from radio - R- or control unit
with display for radio and nav‐
igation - J503- to voice ampli‐
fication control unit - J656-
16 - Radio - R- or control unit with display for radio and navigation - J503- with voice control
17 - LF line connection from telephone transmitter and receiver unit - R36- to radio - R- or control unit with
display for radio and navigation - J503-
18 - Microphone signal from radio - R- or control unit with display for radio and navigation - J503- with voice
control to telephone transmitter and receiver unit
19 - Microphone signal from voice amplification control unit - J656- to radio - R- or control unit with display for
radio and navigation - J503- with voice control
20 - Telephone transmitter and receiver unit - R36-
21 - Line connection for microphone signal from digital voice enhancement control unit - J656- to telephone
transmitter and receiver unit - R36-
22 - CAN bus
❑ Convenience CAN bus in the case of combined gateway/onboard supply control unit
❑ Infotainment CAN bus in the case of separate gateway/onboard supply control unit

24. “Digital voice enhancement” system (DVE), vehicles as of model year 2010 205
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

23 - Audio line connections from digital voice enhancement control unit - J656- to sound system amplifier - R12-
24 - Treble loudspeaker, rear left - R14-
25 - Bass loudspeaker, rear left - R15-
26 - Bass loudspeaker, front left - R21-

24.4 Removing and installing “digital voice


enhancement control unit”
The removal and installation procedure for the “digital voice en‐
hancement control unit” of vehicles as of model year 2010 is the
same procedure as for vehicles up to model year 2009.
– Removing and installing “digital voice enhancement control
unit” ⇒ page 194 .

24.5 Adapting digital voice enhancement mi‐


crophones
Following the exchange of at least one DVE microphone, DVE
microphone production tolerances necessitate the specific adap‐
tation of microphone amplification. Specific adaptation of micro‐
phone amplification is also necessary following the exchange of
the voice amplification control unit.
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
This adaptation is carried out automatically via channel 1 in the
basic settings menu of the vehicle diagnostic tester . The following
prerequisites must be met for this:
♦ All seats are installed and set to the normal seating position in
the direction of travel
♦ All windows and doors are closed
♦ No persons or objects not belonging to the vehicle are in the
vehicle interior
Following the activation of automatic adaptation, defined noise is
output via the loudspeakers for approx. 5 seconds. The signals
recorded by the microphones are used by the “digital voice en‐
hancement” system to set the gain.

206 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

25 Telephone system
⇒ “25.1 General description - telephone system”, page 207
⇒ “25.2 Overview of fitting locations - telephone system”,
page 209
⇒ “25.3 Fitting location overview - telephone system in rear pas‐
senger compartment”, page 210
⇒ “25.4 System overview - preparation for mobile telephone, ve‐
hicles as of 05.2007”, page 212
⇒ “25.5 System overview - preparation for mobile telephone, ve‐
hicles as of model year 2010”, page 215
⇒ “25.6 Removing and installing telephone bracket”, page 220
⇒ “25.7 Removing and installing handset, telephone system in
rear passenger compartment”, page 225
⇒ “25.8 Removing and installing mobile telephone operating elec‐
tronics control unit”, page 226
⇒ “25.9 Removing and installing telephone transmitter and re‐
ceiver unit”, page 228
⇒ “25.10 Removing and installing telephone system microphone”,
page 229
⇒ “25.11 Removing and installing adapter box for telephone sys‐
tem in rear passenger compartment”, page 233
⇒ “25.12 Removing and installing loudspeaker control unit for tel‐
ephone system in rear passenger compartment”, page 235
⇒ “25.13 Removing and installing emergency assistance call but‐
ton”, page 236

25.1 General description - telephone system


Vehicles up to model year 2009:
Two versions of telephone system are available in the Transport‐
er. Either as a complete telephone system or a preparation for
mobile telephone.
The telephone system or the mobile phone preparation is avail‐
able only in combination with a radio or a radio navigation system.
It is possible to retrofit a mobile telephone if the vehicle is pre‐
pared for installation of a telephone.
The mobile telephone operating electronics control unit (interface
box) is factory-fitted in vehicles with preparation for mobile tele‐
phone.
The only item that is required is an adapter cable for connection
between the desired mobile phone to the VDA connector of the
mobile telephone operating electronics control unit (interface
box).
In the event of repair work or for fault finding: ⇒ vehicle diagnostic
tester , ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting
locations
Preparation for mobile telephone “UTP Premium with Bluetooth”,
vehicles as of model year 2010:
The preparation for mobile telephone “UTP Premium with Blue‐
tooth” is only available in combination with a radio or a radio/
navigation system.

25. Telephone system 207


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

The “UHV Premium with Bluetooth” is a permanently installed tel‐


ephone. It has wireless access to the telephone data stored on a
mobile telephone logged onto the vehicle system via Bluetooth.
The “UTP Premium with Bluetooth” demands that the mobile tel‐
ephone to be connected is equipped with a Bluetooth interface. It
must also support the “Remote SIM Access Profile” (rSAP).
rSAP can be used to access the directory entries on the mobile
telephone SIM card.
For further information and notes on operation, refer to the ⇒
Operating manual and ⇒ Self-study programme No. 419 ; The
Scirocco 2009 .
In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the ⇒ vehicle
diagnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode ⇒ Current flow
diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
Preparation for mobile telephone “UTP with audio streaming”, ve‐
hicles as of model year 2010:
The preparation for mobile telephone “UTP with audio streaming”
is only available in combination with a radio or a radio/navigation
system.
On the “UTP with audio streaming”, two Bluetooth profiles are
used:
♦ HFP stands for “hands-free profile” and is a profile for the tel‐
ephone audio/voice channel. In this case, pure voice data are
transferred.
♦ With the Bluetooth profile “A2DP audio streaming”, music files
of the registered Bluetooth unit are sent to the UTP control unit
in stereo quality. The volume of transferred data is then much
greater than with pure voice data.
Telephone system in rear passenger compartment
The telephone system in rear passenger compartment (hands-
free system in rear passenger compartment with private mode)
works independently from all other preparations for mobile tele‐
phones in the vehicle. The telephone system in the rear passen‐
ger compartment cannot be controlled via the menus in the dash
panel insert or the factory-installed radio or navigation system.
Refer to ⇒ operating manual for the mobile telephone and the
accessory.
The Bluetooth technology is used to link a mobile telephone to
the hands-free system of the vehicle. For using the telephone
system in rear passenger compartment with a mobile telephone
via Bluetooth a respective hand-shake procedure must be carried
out once, ⇒ Operating manual .
If a mobile telephone is linked to the telephone system in rear
passenger compartment via the hands-free profile (HFP) and the
mobile telephone is not placed in the charging cradle, observe the
notes for use of mobile telephones in the vehicle without being
connected to the external aerial ⇒ page 4 .
Depending on equipment level, the telephone system in rear pas‐
senger compartment uses the microphones of the “digital voice
enhancement” (DVE) or a separately installed microphone.
For further information and notes on operation, refer to the ⇒
Operating manual or ⇒ Self-study programme No. 422 ; Mobile
telephone with Bluetooth .
Fault detection and fault display:
The telephone systems are equipped with self-diagnosis.
In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the vehicle di‐
agnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode.

208 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Note

Before beginning fault finding on vehicles with “digital voice en‐


hancement” system, be sure to read the notes in the chapter
“Digital voice enhancement” system:

♦ For vehicles up to model year 2009 ⇒ page 190


♦ for vehicles as of model year 2010 ⇒ page 199

25.2 Overview of fitting locations - telephone system

1 - Multifunction steering wheel


2 - Dash panel insert
3 - Telephone microphone -
R38- for hands-free telephony
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 229 .
❑ The microphone is not
fitted if the vehicle is
equipped with a “digital
voice enhancement”
system. In this case, the
microphones of the “dig‐
ital voice enhancement”
system are used for the
telephone system.
4 - Connector for microphone
❑ Installed in mounting
frame of front interior
light.
5 - Telephone aerial - R51-
❑ Installed at front of roof.
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 244 .
6 - Navigation aerial (GPS) -
R50-
❑ Installed at front of roof.
7 - Connectors for aerial wires
❑ Connectors for tele‐
phone aerial and navi‐
gation aerial.
❑ Installed under roof
headliner near A-pillar.
8 - Radio - R-
or control unit with display for radio and navigation - J503- (radio/navigation system)

25. Telephone system 209


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

9 - Loudspeaker group, right


10 - Sound system amplifier - J525-
11 - Loudspeaker group, left
12 - Voltage supply for mobile telephone operating electronics control unit (interface box)
13 - Connector on the telephone bracket
❑ Installed in lower telephone bracket.
14 - Mobile phone -R54-
❑ Removing and installing telephone bracket ⇒ page 220 .
15 - Connector to mobile telephone operating electronics control unit
❑ Installed in dash panel below glove compartment.
16 - Mobile telephone operating electronics control unit - J412- (interface box)
❑ Installed in dash panel below glove compartment.
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 226 .
17 - Steering column electronics control unit - J527-

25.3 Fitting location overview - telephone system in rear passenger compartment

1 - Loudspeaker control unit


❑ Installed in front pas‐
senger seat compart‐
ment.
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 235
2 - Mobile telephone operating
electronics control unit - J412-
❑ Installed behind right C-
pillar trim.
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 227
3 - Telephone bracket
❑ Installed on C-pillar trim.
❑ With mobile phone
charging function.
❑ With operating unit for
volume control and
Bluetooth.
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 224
❑ Additional information:
⇒ Operating manual
4 - Adapter box for handset in
centre arm rest
❑ Installed under right
seat of double seat row.
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 233
5 - Handset in centre armrest
❑ Installed in centre arm
rest of right seat of dou‐

210 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

ble seat row.


❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 225
6 - Telephone aerial - R51-
❑ Installed at rear of roof.
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 264
7 - Rear right microphone - R145-
❑ For hands-free operation of telephone system in rear passenger compartment.
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 232 .
❑ The microphone is not fitted if the vehicle is equipped with a “digital voice enhancement” system. In this
case, the microphones of the “digital voice enhancement” system are used for the telephone system.
❑ System overview for vehicles with “digital voice enhancement” system ⇒ page 203 .
❑ System overview for vehicles without “digital voice enhancement” system ⇒ page 205 .

25. Telephone system 211


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

25.4 System overview - preparation for mo‐


bile telephone, vehicles as of 05.2007
⇒ “25.4.1 System overview - preparation for mobile telephone
UTP Standard ”, page 212
⇒ “25.4.2 System overview - preparation for mobile telephone
UTP Premium ”, page 213

25.4.1 System overview - preparation for mobile telephone “UTP Standard”

1 - Loudspeaker group, left


2 - Loudspeaker group, right
3 - Radio - R- or control unit
with display for radio and nav‐
igation - J503-
4 - CAN bus
5 - Diagnostics interface for da‐
ta bus - J533-
6 - Control unit in dash panel
insert - J285-
7 - Multifunction buttons on left
in steering wheel - E440-
8 - Multifunction buttons on
right in steering wheel - E441-
9 - Multifunction steering wheel
control unit - J453-
10 - Steering column electron‐
ics control unit - J527-
11 - Telephone aerial - R65-
12 - Onboard supply control
unit - J519-
13 - Aerial wire from mobile
phone holder to roof aerial
14 - Mobile telephone bracket
15 - Line connections from mo‐
bile phone holder to mobile
phone operating electronics
control unit - J412-
❑ Voltage supply for
charging mode
❑ Input signals
❑ Output signals
16 - Voltage supply, positive
17 - Voltage supply, negative
18 - Mobile phone - R54-
❑ Wireless connection to mobile telephone operating electronics control unit - J412-
19 - Mobile telephone operating electronics control unit - J412-
20 - Hands-free function via headset
❑ Wireless connection to mobile telephone operating electronics control unit - J412-
❑ Optional

212 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

21 - Telephone microphone - R38-


❑ For hands-free operation of telephone
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 229
❑ The microphone is not fitted if the vehicle is equipped with a “digital voice enhancement” system. In this
case, the microphones of the “digital voice enhancement” system are used for the telephone system.
❑ In the case of vehicles with “digital voice enhancement” system, see also "System overview - “digital
voice enhancement” system without voice control" ⇒ page 203 .

25.4.2 System overview - preparation for mobile telephone “UTP Premium”

1 - Loudspeaker group, left


2 - Loudspeaker group, right
3 - Radio - R- or control unit
with display for radio and nav‐
igation - J503-
4 - CAN bus
5 - Diagnostics interface for da‐
ta bus - J533-
6 - Control unit in dash panel
insert - J285-
7 - Multifunction buttons on left
in steering wheel - E440-
8 - Multifunction buttons on
right in steering wheel - E441-
9 - Multifunction steering wheel
control unit - J453-
10 - Steering column electron‐
ics control unit - J527-
11 - Telephone aerial - R65-
12 - Onboard supply control
unit - J519-
13 - Mobile telephone bracket
❑ Optional, only charging
function
14 - Line connection from mo‐
bile phone holder to mobile
phone operating electronics
control unit - J412-
❑ Only voltage supply for
charging
15 - Voltage supply, positive
16 - Voltage supply, negative
17 - Mobile phone - R54-
❑ Wireless connection to mobile telephone operating electronics control unit - J412-
18 - Mobile telephone operating electronics control unit - J412-
19 - Hands-free function via headset
❑ Wireless connection to mobile telephone operating electronics control unit - J412-
❑ Optional

25. Telephone system 213


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

20 - Emergency assistance call button - E276-


21 - Telephone microphone - R38-
❑ For hands-free operation of telephone
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 229
❑ The microphone is not fitted if the vehicle is equipped with a “digital voice enhancement” system. In this
case, the microphones of the “digital voice enhancement” system are used for the telephone system.
❑ In the case of vehicles with “digital voice enhancement” system, see also "System overview - “digital
voice enhancement” system without voice control" ⇒ page 203 .

214 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

25.5 System overview - preparation for mo‐


bile telephone, vehicles as of model
year 2010
⇒ “25.5.1 System overview - preparation for mobile telephone
UTP with audio streaming ”, page 215
⇒ “25.5.2 System overview - preparation for mobile telephone
UTP Premium with Bluetooth ”, page 217
⇒ “25.5.3 System overview - preparation for mobile telephone in
conjunction with radio navigation system RNS 315 ”, page 218

25.5.1 System overview - preparation for mobile telephone “UTP with audio
streaming”

1 - Driver side exterior mirror -


VX4- with aerial system
❑ Integrated into left exte‐
rior mirror.
2 - Telephone bracket - R126-
3 - Operating unit for prepara‐
tion for mobile telephone -
E508-
❑ Breakdown emergency
button and information
button on mobile tele‐
phone bracket
❑ Additional information:
⇒ Operating manual
4 - Mobile phone - R54-
5 - Bluetooth radio connection
for music and speech
❑ HFP profile.
❑ A2DP profile.
6 - Line connection for the LF
stereo audio signal
❑ From telephone trans‐
mitter and receiver unit
to radio or radio/naviga‐
tion system.
7 - Telephone microphone -
R38-
❑ For hands-free opera‐
tion of telephone
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 229
❑ The microphone is not
fitted if the vehicle is
equipped with a “digital
voice enhancement” system. In this case, the microphones of the “digital voice enhancement” system
are used for the telephone system.
❑ In the case of vehicles with the “digital voice enhancement” system, see also "System overview - “digital
voice enhancement” system without voice control" ⇒ page 203 , or "System overview - “digital voice
enhancement” system with voice control" ⇒ page 205 .
8 - Line connection for voice control from radio - R- or control unit with display for radio and navigation - J503-
❑ Line connection is only present in the case of radio - R- or control unit with display for radio and navigation
- J503- without voice control system (VCS)

25. Telephone system 215


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019
❑ In the case of vehicles with the “digital voice enhancement” system, see also "System overview - “digital
voice enhancement” system without voice control" ⇒ page 203 , or "System overview - “digital voice
enhancement” system with voice control" ⇒ page 205 .
9 - Radio - R- or control unit with display for radio and navigation - J503-
10 - Convenience CAN bus
11 - Onboard supply control unit - J519-
12 - LIN bus
13 - Multifunction buttons on left in steering wheel - E440- and multifunction buttons on right in steering wheel
- E441-
14 - Telephone transmitter and receiver unit - R36-
❑ Installed under glove compartment.
❑ Removing and installing for vehicles as of model year 2010 ⇒ page 228 .
15 - Line connection to telephone bracket
❑ Aerial diagnosis.
❑ Button recognition.
❑ 12 V for charging cradle.

216 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

25.5.2 System overview - preparation for mobile telephone “UTP Premium with
Bluetooth”

1 - Notebook, laptop
❑ Not part of standard
equipment
❑ Transmission and re‐
ception of data via tele‐
phone transmitter and
receiver unit.
❑ Bluetooth profile: DUN.
❑ Additional information:
⇒ Operating manual .
2 - Headset
❑ Not part of standard
equipment
❑ Ensures privacy tele‐
phone calls in vehicle.
Passengers cannot
hear conversation.
❑ Bluetooth profile: HFP.
❑ Additional information:
⇒ Operating manual .
3 - Multimedia player with
Bluetooth profile
❑ Not part of standard
equipment
❑ Enables listening to au‐
dio contents via the ra‐
dio.
❑ Bluetooth profiles:
♦ A2DP
♦ AVRCP
❑ Additional information:
⇒ Operating manual .
4 - Mobile phone - R54-
Bluetooth profiles:
♦ rSAP
♦ AVRCP
♦ GMCP
♦ PBAP
♦ SPP
♦ HFP
♦ A2DP
5 - Radio connection to telephone transmitter and receiver unit via Bluetooth
6 - Driver side exterior mirror - VX4- with aerial system
❑ Integrated into left exterior mirror.
7 - Telephone bracket - R126- with operating unit for preparation for mobile phone - E508-
❑ Breakdown emergency button and information button on mobile telephone bracket
❑ Optional

25. Telephone system 217


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

8 - Line connection to telephone bracket


❑ Button recognition.
❑ 12 V for charging cradle.
9 - CAN bus drive
10 - Control unit in dash panel insert - J285-
11 - Line connection for the LF stereo audio signal
❑ From telephone transmitter and receiver unit to radio or radio/navigation system.
12 - Telephone microphone - R38-
❑ For hands-free operation of telephone
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 229
❑ The microphone is not fitted if the vehicle is equipped with a “digital voice enhancement” system. In this
case, the microphones of the “digital voice enhancement” system are used for the telephone system.
❑ In the case of vehicles with the “digital voice enhancement” system, see also "System overview - “digital
voice enhancement” system without voice control" ⇒ page 203 , or "System overview - “digital voice
enhancement” system with voice control" ⇒ page 205 .
13 - Line connection for voice control from radio - R- or control unit with display for radio and navigation - J503-
❑ Line connection is only present in the case of radio - R- or control unit with display for radio and navigation
- J503- with voice control system (VCS)
❑ In the case of vehicles with the “digital voice enhancement” system, see also "System overview - “digital
voice enhancement” system without voice control" ⇒ page 203 , or "System overview - “digital voice
enhancement” system with voice control" ⇒ page 205 .
14 - Radio - R- or control unit with display for radio and navigation - J503-
15 - Convenience CAN bus
16 - Onboard supply control unit - J519-
17 - LIN bus
18 - Multifunction buttons on left in steering wheel - E440- and multifunction buttons on right in steering wheel
- E441-
19 - Telephone transmitter and receiver unit - J412-
❑ Installed under glove compartment.
❑ Removing and installing for vehicles as of model year 2010 ⇒ page 228 .
20 - Emergency assistance call button - E276-
❑ Additional information: ⇒ Operating manual

25.5.3 System overview - preparation for mo‐


bile telephone in conjunction with radio
navigation system “RNS 315”
The version shown in the diagram may differ in the actual vehicle
depending on the model and equipment.

218 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Control unit in dash panel


insert - J285-
2 - Telephone microphone -
R38-
❑ For hands-free opera‐
tion of telephone
❑ Installed in front interior
light in roof console
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling, vehicles with com‐
mercial vehicle equip‐
ment ⇒ page 230 .
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling, vehicles with Multi‐
van equipment
⇒ page 231 .
3 - Control unit with display for
radio and navigation - J503-
❑ “RNS 315”
4 - Sound system
5 - Wireless data transfer for
telephone
❑ Audio/voice in the
“Hands Free Profile”
HFP.
❑ Audio/music in the
“A2DP profile”
6 - Mobile phone - R54-
❑ Optional equipment
7 - Telephone bracket - R126-
with operating unit for prepara‐
tion for mobile phone - E508-
❑ With connection to ex‐
ternal aerial
❑ Breakdown emergency button and information button on mobile telephone bracket
❑ Optional
8 - Voltage supply for retaining bracket of telephone
9 - External multimedia player
10 - Wireless data transfer
❑ Audio/music in the “A2DP profile”
11 - Cable connection for telephone aerial - R65-
12 - Aerial base line connection
13 - Exterior mirror on driver side - VX4- with R248 aerial for AM/FM, telephone aerial - R65-
❑ Designed as modular exterior mirror or extension mirror.
❑ Integrated in left exterior mirror.
❑ Removing and installing aerials ⇒ page 254 .
14 - Steering column electronics control unit - J527-
15 - Multifunction buttons on left in steering wheel - E440- and multifunction buttons on right in steering wheel
- E441-
❑ Additional information: chapter "Multifunction steering wheel" ⇒ page 285 .

25. Telephone system 219


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

25.6 Removing and installing telephone


bracket
⇒ “25.6.1 Removing and installing telephone bracket, Multivan
version”, page 220
⇒ “25.6.2 Removing and installing telephone bracket, commercial
vehicle version”, page 221
⇒ “25.6.3 Removing and installing telephone bracket, telephone
system in rear passenger compartment”, page 224

25.6.1 Removing and installing telephone


bracket, “Multivan” version
For vehicles with “commercial vehicle equipment”, refer to "Re‐
moving and installing telephone bracket, “commercial vehicle”
version" ⇒ page 221 .
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove mobile phone from telephone bracket.
– Press and hold button -1- and slide out mobile phone retainer
downwards -arrow-.

– Insert a suitable screwdriver into the slot in the contact plate,


turn the screwdriver slightly, and lever contact plate off base
mount.

– Carefully nudge base mount in direction of -arrows- until it


pops out of the catch.

220 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Unscrew the 4 securing bolts -arrows- from contact plate.

– Push wiring harness in contact plate in -direction of arrow- and


remove it.

– Unscrew securing bolt -arrow- from base plate and remove


base plate.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

– To install bracket, press it from above onto base plate


-arrows- until it engages audibly.

25.6.2 Removing and installing telephone


bracket, “commercial vehicle” version
For vehicles with a higher level of equipment, such as Multivan,
etc. see "Removing and installing telephone bracket, “Multivan”
version ⇒ page 220 ".

25. Telephone system 221


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Note

The mobile telephone bracket is installed on the dash panel


-arrow-.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove mobile phone from telephone bracket.

– Press and hold button -arrow- and slide out mobile phone re‐
tainer downwards.

– Insert a suitable screwdriver into telephone bracket -arrow-


and lever off trim in -direction of arrow A-.

– Unscrew securing bolt -arrow- in base mount of telephone


bracket.

222 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Pull telephone bracket in -direction of arrow- off dash panel,


as far as the connected wiring allows.

– Insert a suitable screwdriver into locking mechanism of con‐


tact plate -arrow- and push out contact plate in
-direction of arrow A-.

– Unscrew the 4 securing bolts from contact plate -arrows-.

– Push wiring harness in contact plate in -direction of arrow- and


remove it from guide.

25. Telephone system 223


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Push connector in -direction of arrow- forwards out of contact


plate and guide out wiring harness through the slot -A- in the
contact plate.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

25.6.3 Removing and installing telephone


bracket, telephone system in rear pas‐
senger compartment

Note

♦ The telephone bracket includes the operating unit for volume


control and Bluetooth.
♦ Additional information: ⇒ Operating manual .
♦ The telephone bracket is installed on the right C-pillar trim.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove mobile phone from telephone bracket and remove
mobile phone retainer, ⇒ Operating manual .
– Remove right side trim panel between D-pillar and C-pillar ⇒
General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 70 ; Trims, interior .
– Separate aerial connection -3- and remove side panel trim.

– Counterhold on securing bolt -2- and slide cover -1- upwards.

224 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Unscrew securing nut -4-.


– Remove securing bolt -3-.
– Detach retainers for wiring harness -1- and thread wiring har‐
ness through aperture out of side panel trim -2-.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Note

♦ If cable ties, bonded parts or insulation are removed during


removal of the telephone bracket, the same versions of the
respective components must be reinstalled at the same posi‐
tions during installation procedure.
♦ If the wire retainers are not reinstalled, there may be rattling
during vehicle operation or wires and connections may be‐
come damaged.

25.7 Removing and installing handset, tele‐


phone system in rear passenger com‐
partment

Note

The handset for the telephone system in rear passenger com‐


partment is installed in centre arm rest of right seat of double seat
row.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Open lid of centre arm rest of right seat of double seat row and
remove handset.
– Remove centre armrest of right seat of double seat row ⇒
General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 72 ; Seats, 3rd row
(Business); Removing and installing armrest .
– Remove backrest trim of right seat of double seat row ⇒ Gen‐
eral body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 72 ; Seats, 3rd row (Busi‐
ness); Removing and installing backrest trim .
– Remove lower trim at rear of double seat row ⇒ General body
repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 72 ; Seats, 3rd row (Business); Re‐
moving and installing lower trim of rear bench seat .
– Release connector -1- at rear and disconnect it from adapter
box.

25. Telephone system 225


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Release wiring harness -1- from retainers along entire length


and remove it upwards from seat backrest.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Note

♦ If cable ties, bonded parts or insulation are removed during


removal of the telephone bracket, the same versions of the
respective components must be reinstalled at the same posi‐
tions during installation procedure.
♦ If the wire retainers are not reinstalled, there may be rattling
during vehicle operation or wires and connections may be‐
come damaged.

25.8 Removing and installing mobile tele‐


phone operating electronics control unit
⇒ “25.8.1 Removing and installing mobile telephone operating
electronics control unit”, page 226
⇒ “25.8.2 Removing and installing mobile telephone operating
electronics control unit, telephone system in rear passenger com‐
partment”, page 227

25.8.1 Removing and installing mobile tele‐


phone operating electronics control unit

Note

The mobile telephone operating electronics control unit - J412- is


installed under the glove compartment.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove glove compartment ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trims; Removing and
installing glove compartment .

– Swivel control unit in -direction of arrow- and remove it.

226 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Release connector by pressing on locking spring -1- and swiv‐


el clip -2- in -direction of arrow-.

– Release connector by pressing on the locking spring -arrow-


and pull connector off.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

– Engage control unit properly in catches -arrows- when instal‐


ling it.

25.8.2 Removing and installing mobile tele‐


phone operating electronics control unit,
telephone system in rear passenger
compartment

Note

The mobile telephone operating electronics control unit - J412- is


installed behind the right C-pillar trim.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove upper C-pillar trim on right side ⇒ General body re‐
pairs, interior; Rep. gr. 70 ; Pillar and side panel trims; Re‐
moving and installing upper C-pillar trim .

25. Telephone system 227


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Release connectors -7 to 4- and connector -2- and pull them


off control unit -1-.

– Unscrew the 4 securing bolts -arrows- and remove mobile tel‐


ephone operating electronics control - J412- -1-.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Note

♦ If cable ties, bonded parts or insulation are removed during


removal of the telephone bracket, the same versions of the
respective components must be reinstalled at the same posi‐
tions during installation procedure.
♦ If the wire retainers are not reinstalled, there may be rattling
during vehicle operation or wires and connections may be‐
come damaged.

25.9 Removing and installing telephone


transmitter and receiver unit
⇒ “25.9.1 Removing and installing telephone transmitter and re‐
ceiver unit, vehicles as of model year 2010”, page 228

25.9.1 Removing and installing telephone


transmitter and receiver unit, vehicles as
of model year 2010

Note

The telephone transmitter and receiver unit -arrow- is installed


below the glove compartment.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove glove compartment ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trims; Removing and
installing glove compartment .

228 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Pull telephone transmitter and receiver unit -A- out of mount‐


ings -B-.

– Pull out retaining clip -arrow- and disconnect aerial wire.


Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

25.10 Removing and installing telephone sys‐


tem microphone
⇒ “25.10.1 Removing and installing the microphone for the tele‐
phone system, vehicles up to model year 2009”, page 229
⇒ “25.10.2 Removing and installing microphone for telephone
system, vehicles as of model year 2010, with commercial vehicle
equipment ”, page 230
⇒ “25.10.3 Removing and installing microphone for telephone
system, vehicles as of model year 2010, with Multivan equipment
”, page 231
⇒ “25.10.4 Removing and installing microphone for telephone
system, telephone system in rear passenger compartment”, page
232

25.10.1 Removing and installing the microphone


for the telephone system, vehicles up to
model year 2009
The microphone for hands-free telephony is installed in the front
interior light.

Note

♦ The microphone is not fitted if the vehicle is equipped with a


“digital voice enhancement” system. In this case, the micro‐
phones of the “digital voice enhancement” system are used for
the telephone system.
♦ In the case of vehicles with the “digital voice enhancement”
system, see also "System overview - “digital voice enhance‐
ment” system without voice control" ⇒ page 203 , or "System
overview - “digital voice enhancement” system with voice con‐
trol" ⇒ page 205 .

25. Telephone system 229


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Open spectacles compartment in interior light unit.
– Remove securing bolts -arrows-.
– Remove interior light ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 96 ; Lights,
bulbs, switches - interior; Lights and controls in roof trim; Re‐
moving and installing front interior light .

– Remove securing bolts -arrows-.


– Remove complete interior light unit from roof headliner.
– Remove connector in -direction of arrow- from interior light
frame.

– Release -1- and disconnect microphone connector -2-.

– Release the 3 catches -arrows- and remove microphone.


Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

25.10.2 Removing and installing microphone for


telephone system, vehicles as of model

230 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

year 2010, with “commercial vehicle


equipment”

Note

♦ The microphone for hands-free operation of telephone is in‐


stalled in the front interior light -arrow-.
♦ Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the location and the
appearance may differ from the graphics shown here.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove interior light ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 96 ; Lights,
bulbs, switches - interior; Lights and controls in roof trim; Re‐
moving and installing front interior light .
– Release and disconnect microphone connector.

– Release the 3 locking lugs -arrows- and remove microphone.


Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

25.10.3 Removing and installing microphone for


telephone system, vehicles as of model
year 2010, with “Multivan equipment”

Note

♦ The microphone for hands-free operation of telephone is in‐


stalled in the front interior light -arrow-.
♦ The microphone is not fitted if the vehicle is equipped with a
“digital voice enhancement” system. In this case, the micro‐
phones of the “digital voice enhancement” system are used for
the telephone system.
♦ In the case of vehicles with the “digital voice enhancement”
system, see also "System overview - “digital voice enhance‐
ment” system without voice control" ⇒ page 203 , or "System
overview - “digital voice enhancement” system with voice con‐
trol" ⇒ page 205 .
♦ Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the location and the
appearance may differ from the graphics shown here.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

25. Telephone system 231


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Lever out microphone insert using a suitable screwdriver at


points marked with -arrows-.
– Release and disconnect microphone connector.

– Release the 3 locking lugs -arrows- and remove microphone.


Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

25.10.4 Removing and installing microphone for


telephone system, telephone system in
rear passenger compartment

Note

♦ The microphone for the telephone system in rear passenger


compartment is installed in the roof headliner above the right
seat of the double seat row.
♦ The microphone is not fitted if the vehicle is equipped with a
“digital voice enhancement” system. In this case, the micro‐
phones of the “digital voice enhancement” system are used for
the telephone system.
♦ System overview - “digital voice enhancement” system without
voice control system ⇒ page 203 .
♦ System overview - “digital voice enhancement” system with
voice control system ⇒ page 205 .
♦ Additional information: ⇒ Operating manual .
♦ Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the location and the
appearance may differ from the graphics shown here.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

232 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Carefully unclip microphone cover from roof headliner


-arrow-.

Note

The catch for the microphone cover -arrow- in the roof headliner
is located on the inside (middle of vehicle).

– Release and disconnect connector and remove microphone.


Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

25.11 Removing and installing adapter box for


telephone system in rear passenger
compartment

Note

♦ The adapter box connects the handset for the telephone sys‐
tem in rear passenger compartment located in the centre
armrest with the telephone system.
♦ Additional information: ⇒ Operating manual .
♦ The adapter box for the telephone system in rear passenger
compartment is installed under the right seat of the double seat
row.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove upper trim at front of double seat row ⇒ General body
repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 72 ; Seats, 3rd row (Business); Re‐
moving and installing upper trim of rear bench seat .
– Remove lower trim at front of double seat row ⇒ General body
repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 72 ; Seats, 3rd row (Business); Re‐
moving and installing lower trim of rear bench seat .
– Remove lower trim at rear of double seat row ⇒ General body
repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 72 ; Seats, 3rd row (Business); Re‐
moving and installing lower trim of rear bench seat .
– Release and disconnect connector -1- at rear.

25. Telephone system 233


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Release and disconnect connector -1- at front.

– Unscrew the 2 securing nuts -arrows- and remove adapter box


-1- downwards.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Caution

Risk of damage to housing.


If the adjustment nut is nut adjusted to a height above upper
edge of adapter box housing, the retaining tabs on the adapter
box housing may break when the securing nuts are tightened.
Adjust the adjustment nut to the correct dimension.

Adjusting adjustment nuts on adapter box housing:


1 - Adjustment nut
2 - Tab on adapter box housing
A - Dimension between upper edge of tab and upper edge of ad‐
justment nut
B - Dimension between upper edge of tab and upper edge of
adapter box housing
– Adjust adjustment nuts -1- so that dimension -a- is higher than
dimension -b-.
– Carry out the same adjustment for the second stud bolt of the
adapter box housing.

Note

♦ If cable ties, bonded parts or insulation are removed during


removal of the telephone bracket, the same versions of the
respective components must be reinstalled at the same posi‐
tions during installation procedure.
♦ If the wire retainers are not reinstalled, there may be rattling
during vehicle operation or wires and connections may be‐
come damaged.

234 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

25.12 Removing and installing loudspeaker


control unit for telephone system in rear
passenger compartment

Note

♦ If the telephone system in rear passenger compartment is


used, the loudspeaker control unit controls the use of the loud‐
speakers in the vehicle.
♦ Additional information: ⇒ Operating manual .
♦ The loudspeaker control unit for telephone system in rear pas‐
senger compartment is installed on the component carrier in
the seat box on front passenger side.
♦ In vehicles with TV tuner the loudspeaker control unit is in‐
stalled vertically on the backside of the component carrier.
♦ In vehicles without TV tuner the loudspeaker control unit is
installed horizontally on top of the component carrier.
♦ The following illustrations show removal and installation of the
loudspeaker control unit which is installed horizontally.
♦ The removal and installation of the loudspeaker control unit
which is installed vertically is similar.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove front passenger seat ⇒ General body repairs, interi‐
or; Rep. gr. 72 ; Front seats; Removing and installing front
seat .
– Release and disconnect 3× connectors -1-, -2- and -3- on wir‐
ing harness for loudspeaker control unit.

– Unscrew the 6 securing bolts -arrows- from component carrier


-1-.
– Lift component carrier -1- together with loudspeaker control
unit -2- out of seat box, and turn it around.

25. Telephone system 235


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Unscrew the 2 securing bolts and remove loudspeaker control


unit -1- from component carrier.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

The housings of connectors -1- and -2- are provided with a cod‐
ing.
1 - Coding U1
2 - Coding U2
3 - Power supply for control unit
– Connect and engage connectors according to coding.

25.13 Removing and installing emergency as‐


sistance call button
⇒ “25.13.1 Removing and installing emergency call button, vehi‐
cles as of model year 2010”, page 236

25.13.1 Removing and installing emergency call


button, vehicles as of model year 2010

Note

Depending on equipment variant in area of front interior light, in‐


stallation location of emergency call button may deviate from that
of the illustrations.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Unclip trim on front interior light -arrows-.

236 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Using a suitable small screwdriver, lever interior light out of


aperture -arrow-.
– Release and disconnect connectors and remove interior light.

– Unclip circuit board -2 arrows- and remove it from guide


-arrow A-.
– Remove emergency assistance call button from interior light.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

– When installing the circuit board, first insert it into the guide
-arrow A- and then engage it on the opposite side -2 arrows-.

25. Telephone system 237


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

26 Aerial systems, vehicles up to model


year 2009
⇒ “26.1 General description - aerial systems, vehicles up to model
year 2009”, page 238
⇒ “26.2 Fitting location overview - diversity aerial system”,
page 239
⇒ “26.3 Transmitting power - aerial systems”, page 240
⇒ “26.4 Removing and installing aerial selection control unit J515
”, page 241
⇒ “26.5 Removing and installing aerial amplifier for side window
aerial”, page 242
⇒ “26.6 Removing and installing windscreen aerial”, page 243
⇒ “26.7 Removing and installing bracket of telephone, navigation
system and auxiliary heater aerial R66 ”, page 244
⇒ “26.8 Renewal of aerial wiring”, page 245

26.1 General description - aerial systems, ve‐


hicles up to model year 2009
There are different types of aerials for the Transporter:
♦ The roof aerial
The roof aerial is always installed if the vehicle is equipped with
a radio navigation system and/or a telephone system.
♦ The windscreen aerial
The windscreen aerial is installed in combination with all radios
or radio/navigation systems.
The exception is the “Caravelle” version of the Transporter. In this
case, the aerial with amplifier is installed in the rear right side
window instead of the windscreen aerial in combination with the
“ALPHA”, “BETA”, “GAMMA”, “R 110” or “RCD 200” radios.
♦ Rear right side window aerial with amplifier
This aerial is installed in the “Caravelle” version of the Transporter
in combination with the “ALPHA”, “BETA”, “GAMMA”, “R 110” or
“RCD 200” radios.
The only aerial fitted in the “California” up to 07.09 is the wind‐
screen aerial.
♦ The diversity aerial system
The diversity aerial system is installed in better equipped vehicles
such as the Multivan and so on.
The diversity aerial system consists of the following components:
♦ A radio/navigation system or a radio
♦ the 4 aerials in the rear side windows
♦ the aerial amplifiers over the rear side windows
♦ The aerial selection control unit - J515- , installed only in con‐
junction with radio navigation system “RNS with MFD” with CD
player or with “DELTA” radio
♦ The diversity aerial system optimises and improves the quality
of reception in the vehicle.
♦ The radio checks the aerial input signal and outputs the result
via an additional aerial connection. The information from the

238 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

test result then reaches the aerial selection control unit. If the
aerial signal being received is too weak, this switches to a dif‐
ferent aerial (diversity function). The customer will not be able
to perceive this procedure audibly.
♦ In conjunction with the radio navigation system with DVD play‐
er “RNS 2 MFD DVD”, there is no control unit for aerial selec‐
tion in the vehicle. The diversity function is carried out directly
in the radio navigation system.

Note

♦ When faced with complaints, it is absolutely necessary to un‐


derstand the functions and operation of the radio system.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Operating instructions
♦ When the battery is reconnected, check the items of equip‐
ment in the vehicle (radio, clock, convenience electronics etc.)
with reference to the workshop manual and/or operating in‐
structions and adjust them if necessary.

26.2 Fitting location overview - diversity aerial system

1 - Aerial selection control unit


- J515-
❑ Installed above right
rear side window.
❑ The aerial amplifier for
AM/FM in right rear side
window is integrated in‐
to control unit.
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 241
2 - Aerial amplifier for tele‐
phone and radio - R45-
❑ Installed above right
rear side window.
❑ The aerial amplifier is
designed for FM recep‐
tion.
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 242
3 - Aerial amplifier 2 - R111-
❑ Installed above left rear
side window.
❑ The aerial amplifier is
designed for FM recep‐
tion.
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 242
4 - Aerial amplifier 3 - R112-
❑ Installed above left rear
side window.
❑ The aerial amplifier is
designed for FM recep‐
tion.
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 242

26. Aerial systems, vehicles up to model year 2009 239


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

5 - Aerial - R11-
❑ Installed in left rear side window.
❑ To remove or install, first remove rear side window.
6 - Left rear side window
7 - Aerial - R11-
❑ Installed in left rear side window.
❑ To remove or install, first remove rear side window.
8 - Aerial - R11-
❑ Installed in right rear side window.
❑ To remove or install, first remove rear side window.
9 - Right rear side window
10 - Aerial - R11-
❑ Installed in right rear side window.
❑ To remove or install, first remove rear side window.
11 - Radio - R- or control unit with display for radio and navigation - J503-
❑ Fitting location: in centre console
12 - Mobile telephone operating electronics control unit - J412-
13 - Telephone, navigation system and auxiliary heater aerial - R66-
❑ For navigation and telephone.
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 244

26.3 Transmitting power - aerial systems


Transmitting power, Transporter as of 2004, without plastic roof
»Maxi and High«
Designation Pmax (watts) Prescribed aerial fitting lo‐
cations
Short wave 100 (Peak)3) Centre of roof
< 54 MHz
4 m frequency 20 (effective)4) All fitting locations (on ve‐
band hicle exterior)
2 m frequency 20 (effective) Front wing
band Front centre of roof
Centre of roof
Rear centre of roof
2 m frequency 50 (effective) Centre of roof
band Rear centre of roof
70 cm 50 (effective) Centre of roof
Rear centre of roof
23 cm 20 (effective) Centre of roof
Rear centre of roof
TETRA/ 25 (effective) All fitting locations (on ve‐
TETRAPOL hicle exterior)
D network 10 (Peak) All fitting locations (on ve‐
GSM 900 hicle exterior)
E network 10 (Peak) All fitting locations (on ve‐
GSM 1800 hicle exterior)
GSM 1900
UMTS

240 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Transmitting power, Transporter as of 2004, with plastic roof


»Maxi and High«
Designation Pmax (watts) Prescribed aerial fitting locations
Short wave 100 (Peak) 3)
All fitting locations on roof
< 54 MHz
4 m frequency band 20 (effective)4) All fitting locations on roof
2 m frequency band 20 (effective) All fitting locations on roof
2 m frequency band 50 (effective) All fitting locations on roof
70 cm 50 (effective) All fitting locations on roof
23 cm 20 (effective) All fitting locations on roof
TETRA/ 25 (effective) All fitting locations on roof
TETRAPOL
D network 10 (Peak) All fitting locations on roof
GSM 900
E network 10 (Peak) All fitting locations on roof
GSM 1800
GSM 1900
UMTS
3) PEAK = peak envelope power (max. carrier power)
4) effective = effective transmitting power

Note

♦ Deviations from these specifications (aerial fitting location, fre‐


quency, power) are permitted only in specially justified excep‐
tions following a single-case test performed by the EMC
Centre of the VW AG in Wolfsburg
♦ EMC = electromagnetic compatibility

26.4 Removing and installing aerial selection


control unit - J515-
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– To remove aerial selection control unit, moulded headliner
must be removed ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr.
70 ; Roof trims; Removing and installing moulded headliner .
– Release connectors -arrows- and disconnect.

26. Aerial systems, vehicles up to model year 2009 241


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Unscrew securing nuts -arrows-.

Caution

Risk of wiring damage.


The wire connection between aerial selection control unit and
side window is highly sensitive to mechanical stress.
An aerial wire which has been pulled off the side window can‐
not be repaired. The entire side window must then be renewed.
Handle the wire connection between aerial selection control
unit and side window with care.

– When removing aerial amplifier, carefully release and discon‐


nect connector -1- for wire leading to side window.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

26.5 Removing and installing aerial amplifier


for side window aerial
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– To remove aerial amplifier, moulded headliner must be re‐
moved ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 70 ; Roof
trims; Removing and installing moulded headliner .
– Release and disconnect connector -arrow-.

242 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Remove securing bolt -arrow-.

Caution

Risk of wiring damage.


The wire connection between aerial selection control unit and
side window is highly sensitive to mechanical stress.
An aerial wire which has been pulled off the side window can‐
not be repaired. The entire side window must then be renewed.
Handle the wire connection between aerial selection control
unit and side window with care.

– Release and disconnect connector on aerial amplifier for wire


leading to side window.
– Remove aerial amplifier.

Note

If several aerial amplifiers are removed, mark the individual am‐


plifiers and their respective fitting locations.

Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
Install the amplifiers at the same positions where they were in‐
stalled before removal.

26.6 Removing and installing windscreen


aerial
The windscreen aerial is used in all vehicles with radios or radio/
navigation systems in which the diversity aerial system is not in‐
stalled.
It is the only aerial used in commercial vehicles and campers.
The exception is the “Caravelle” version of the Transporter. In this
case, the aerial with amplifier is installed in the rear right side
window instead of the windscreen aerial in combination with the
“ALPHA”, “BETA”, “GAMMA” or “R 110” radios.
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove front interior light ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 96 ;
Interior lights and switches; Removing and installing interior
lights .
– Remove right sun visor ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 70 ; Trims, insulation; Roof trims; Removing and installing
moulded headliner .
– Remove right A-pillar trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 70 ; Trims, insulation; Pillar and side trims; Removing
and installing A-pillar trim .

26. Aerial systems, vehicles up to model year 2009 243


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Unscrew nut -arrow- from aerial amplifier.

– Carefully unclip wire with push button -arrow- on windscreen.


– Release and disconnect aerial amplifier connector on A-pillar.
– Carefully lower moulded headliner in area of right sun visor
and guide out wire.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Note

♦ Ensure that there is a clean and mechanically flawless contact


between wire and push button on windscreen.
♦ A poor contact (e.g. due to corrosion or loose contact) causes
poor radio reception.

26.7 Removing and installing bracket of tele‐


phone, navigation system and auxiliary
heater aerial - R66-

Note

There are roof aerials in the following versions: “navigation only”,


“telephone only”, “navigation and telephone” or “navigation, tele‐
phone and auxiliary heating”.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove front interior light ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 96 ;
Lights and controls in roof trim; Removing and installing inte‐
rior light .
– Remove right sun visor ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 68 ; Roof trims; Removing and installing moulded head‐
liner .
Only vehicles with sunroof:
– Remove left and right A-pillar trims ⇒ General body repairs,
interior; Rep. gr. 70 ; Pillar and side trims; Removing and in‐
stalling A-pillar trim .
– Remove left sun visor ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 68 ; Roof trims; Removing and installing moulded head‐
liner .

244 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Carefully lower moulded headliner until securing nut of aerial


is accessible.
Continuation for all vehicles:
– Unscrew nut -arrow-.
– Carefully lower moulded headliner in area of right sun visor.

– Release and disconnect connectors -arrows- and remove roof


aerial.

Note

One to three connectors may be present here depending on the


aerial version.

The connector with the violet housing is the wiring connection for
the telephone.
The connector with the blue housing is the wiring connection for
the navigation system.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Note

Ensure that the aerial wires -arrows- are not squeezed in the aer‐
ial base when installing the roof aerial.

26.8 Renewal of aerial wiring


Renewal of aerial wiring: ⇒ Electrical System, General informa‐
tion; Rep. gr. 97 ; Wiring harness repair set; Repairs to wiring
harnesses; Renewal of aerial wiring .

26. Aerial systems, vehicles up to model year 2009 245


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

27 Aerial systems, vehicles as of model


year 2010
⇒ “27.1 General description - aerial systems, vehicles as of model
year 2010”, page 246
⇒ “27.2 Overview of fitting locations - aerial systems”, page 248
⇒ “27.3 Fitting location overview - aerial in modular exterior mir‐
ror”, page 254
⇒ “27.4 Overview of fitting locations - internet access aerial”, page
255
⇒ “27.5 Removing and installing aerial films for AM/FM/TV/DAB
in modular exterior mirror”, page 257
⇒ “27.6 Removing and installing aerial film for GSM/UMTS tele‐
phone in modular exterior mirror”, page 258
⇒ “27.7 Removing and installing aerial for navigation in modular
exterior mirror”, page 260
⇒ “27.8 Removing and installing aerial for AM/FM/DAB in bow-
mounted exterior mirror”, page 262
⇒ “27.9 Removing and installing telephone aerial (GSM) in bow-
mounted exterior mirror”, page 263
⇒ “27.10 Removing and installing roof aerial for telephone system
in rear passenger compartment”, page 264
⇒ “27.11 Removing and installing front roof aerial R216 ”,
page 265
⇒ “27.12 Renewal of aerial wiring”, page 267

27.1 General description - aerial systems, ve‐


hicles as of model year 2010
Infotainment system aerials are used to receive all analogue and
digital signal sources without interference. All vehicle aerials are
integrated into the left and right exterior mirrors.
The aerial concept versions in the vehicle are dependent on rel‐
evant installation of optional accessories (see following list). The
vehicle equipment determines the aerial version. The following
factors determine the layout of the aerial concept:
♦ Radio model (AM/FM1 and FM2 aerial or diversity function)
♦ Navigation system (installation of a GPS navigation aerial)
♦ Digital radio reception DAB in the radio or radio/navigation
system (installation of a DAB aerial),
♦ Preparation for mobile telephone UTP (installation of a GSM
telephone aerial),
♦ TV tuner (installation of a TV aerial).
Aerial modules in left exterior mirror
Up to 2 aerial modules may be integrated into the left exterior
mirror:
♦ AM/FM (basic aerial) or AM/FM/TV (on installation of a TV tu‐
ner) and
♦ GSM (if preparation for mobile telephone UTP has been in‐
stalled)

246 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Aerial modules in right exterior mirror


2 aerial modules are provided in the right exterior mirror. The im‐
pedance converter which is required for operation is dependent
on the installation of further components:
♦ FM2 (for diversity function) or FM2/DAB, if a radio or radio/
navigation system with DAB is installed.
♦ FM2//TV if a TV tuner has been installed
♦ GPS (on installation of a navigation system).
Aerial concept for RCD 310, RCD 510, radio/navigation system
310, 315 and radio/navigation system 510
All units support the diversity function to improve the reception of
FM radio stations in difficult situations. For example, the quality
of reception can be improved with 2 aerials in inner cities and hills
regions. The AM/FM aerial in the left exterior mirror also ensures
basic reception in units without diversity function. A second FM
aerial is additionally integrated into the right mirror to improve the
quality of reception.
Radio or navigation system in combination with preparation for
mobile telephone or digital radio reception DAB
If the RCD 310, RCD 510 radios or the radio/navigation systems
are equipped with a DAB function, a DAB or GSM aerial is used.
A DAB or GSM aerial is also used if the RCD 310, RCD 510 radios
or the radio/navigation systems are equipped with preparation for
mobile telephone (UTP). The GSM aerial connection is oriented
towards the universal preparation for mobile telephone (UTP)
model. In the case of UTP Premium UMTS, the aerial is connec‐
ted directly to the UTP's Car Interface Box. In UTP low BT Audio,
however, the telephone bracket is connected to the GSM aerial.
As a system with integrated preparation for mobile telephone, the
“RNS 315” radio/navigation system establishes a connection di‐
rectly to the GSM aerial.
GPS aerial
The “RNS 310” and “RNS 315” radio/navigation systems and the
“RNS 510” radio/navigation system are additionally connected to
a GPS aerial in the right exterior mirror.
TV reception
If an infotainment system which enables TV reception is installed,
a separate TV tuner is optionally installed. Both exterior mirrors
contain TV aerials, which are connected to the TV tuner. The
second aerial signal is used to improve the quality of reception
(diversity function). In turn, the TV tuner transmits audio/video
signals to the infotainment system.
Vehicles with “Business” equipment level as of model year 2012
have “WiFi” (wireless) internet access and a “GPS” system. A roof
aerial is provided for data transfer. The roof aerial is purely there
to permit the internet access control unit - J666- to be used and
operated. If the vehicle also has a mobile telephone system or a
radio-navigation system, the relevant aerials are located in the
exterior mirrors. Please refer to the relevant chapters
⇒ page 246

27. Aerial systems, vehicles as of model year 2010 247


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

27.2 Overview of fitting locations - aerial sys‐


tems
⇒ “27.2.1 Fitting location overview - simple aerial system with
preparation for radio”, page 248
⇒ “27.2.2 Fitting location overview - aerial system with radio sys‐
tem RCD 210 ”, page 249
⇒ “27.2.3 Fitting location overview - aerial system with radio sys‐
tem RCD 310 ”, page 250
⇒ “27.2.4 Overview of fitting locations - aerial system with radio
navigation system RNS 310 ”, page 251
⇒ “27.2.5 Overview of fitting locations - aerial system with radio
navigation system RNS 315 ”, page 252
⇒ “27.2.6 Overview of fitting locations - aerial system with radio
navigation system RNS 510 ”, page 253

27.2.1 Fitting location overview - simple aerial system with preparation for radio

1 - Exterior mirror on driver


side - VX4- with R248 aerial for
AM/FM
❑ Designed as modular
exterior mirror or exten‐
sion mirror.
❑ Integrated in left exterior
mirror.
❑ Removing and installing
aerials ⇒ page 254 .
2 - Simple AM/FM radio prep‐
aration
3 - Aerial wire
4 - Connector for aerial line
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding B.
5 - Aerial base line connection

248 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

27.2.2 Fitting location overview - aerial system with radio system “RCD 210”

1 - Mobile telephone bracket


❑ SMBA coding D.
❑ Optional
2 - Telephone transmitter and
receiver unit - R36-
❑ SMBA coding D.
3 - Radio - R-
❑ RCD 210
4 - Connector for aerial line
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding D.
5 - Connector for aerial line
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding B.
6 - Aerial base line connection
7 - Exterior mirror on driver
side - VX4- with R248 aerial for
AM/FM and telephone aerial -
R65-
❑ Designed as modular
exterior mirror or exten‐
sion mirror.
❑ Integrated in left exterior
mirror.
❑ Removing and installing
aerials ⇒ page 254 .
8 - Line connection to mobile
telephone bracket
❑ Optional

27. Aerial systems, vehicles as of model year 2010 249


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

27.2.3 Fitting location overview - aerial system with radio system “RCD 310”

1 - Mobile telephone bracket


❑ SMBA coding D.
❑ Optional
2 - Telephone transmitter and
receiver unit - R36-
❑ SMBA coding D.
3 - Radio - R-
❑ RCD 310
4 - Connector for GPS aerial
cable
❑ For Navigation
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding C.
5 - Exterior mirror on passeng‐
er's side - VX5- with digital-ra‐
dio aerial - R183- and radio
aerial 2 - R93-
❑ Designed as modular
exterior mirror or exten‐
sion mirror.
❑ Integrated in right exte‐
rior mirror.
❑ Removing and installing
aerials ⇒ page 254 .
6 - Aerial base line connection
7 - Connector for FM aerial ca‐
ble
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding I.
8 - Connector for DAB aerial
cable
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding A.
9 - Connector for telephone aerial cable
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding D.
10 - Connector for AM/FM aerial cable
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding B.
11 - Aerial base line connection
12 - Exterior mirror on driver side - VX4- with R248 aerial for AM/FM and telephone aerial - R65-
❑ Designed as modular exterior mirror or extension mirror.
❑ Integrated in left exterior mirror.
❑ Removing and installing aerials ⇒ page 254 .
13 - Aerial line connection to telephone bracket
❑ Optional

250 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

27.2.4 Overview of fitting locations - aerial system with radio navigation system
“RNS 310”

1 - Mobile telephone bracket


❑ SMBA coding D.
❑ Optional
2 - Telephone transmitter and
receiver unit - R36-
❑ SMBA coding D.
3 - Control unit with display for
radio and navigation - J503-
❑ RNS 310
4 - Connector for GPS aerial
cable
❑ For Navigation
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding C.
5 - Exterior mirror on passeng‐
er's side - VX5- with radio aer‐
ial 2 - R93- , digital-radio aerial
- R183- and GPS aerial - R50-
❑ Designed as modular
exterior mirror or exten‐
sion mirror.
❑ Integrated in right exte‐
rior mirror.
❑ Removing and installing
aerials ⇒ page 254 .
6 - Aerial base line connection
7 - Connector for FM aerial ca‐
ble
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding I.
8 - Connector for DAB aerial
cable
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding A.
9 - Connector for telephone aerial cable
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding D.
10 - Connector for AM/FM aerial cable
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding B.
11 - Aerial base line connection
12 - Exterior mirror on driver side - VX4- with R248 aerial for AM/FM and telephone aerial - R65-
❑ Designed as modular exterior mirror or extension mirror.
❑ Integrated in left exterior mirror.
❑ Removing and installing aerials ⇒ page 254 .
13 - Aerial line connection to mobile telephone bracket
❑ Optional

27. Aerial systems, vehicles as of model year 2010 251


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

27.2.5 Overview of fitting locations - aerial system with radio navigation system
“RNS 315”

1 - Mobile telephone bracket


❑ SMBA coding D.
❑ Optional
2 - Control unit with display for
radio and navigation - J503-
❑ RNS 315
3 - Connector for GPS aerial
cable
❑ For Navigation
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding C.
4 - Exterior mirror on passeng‐
er's side - VX5- with radio aer‐
ial 2 - R93- , digital-radio aerial
- R183- and GPS aerial - R50-
❑ Designed as modular
exterior mirror or exten‐
sion mirror.
❑ Integrated in right exte‐
rior mirror.
❑ Removing and installing
aerials ⇒ page 254 .
5 - Aerial base line connection
6 - Connector for FM aerial ca‐
ble
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding I.
7 - Connector for DAB aerial
cable
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding A.
8 - Connector for telephone aerial cable
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding D.
❑ Optional
9 - Connector for AM/FM aerial cable
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding B.
10 - Aerial base line connection
11 - Exterior mirror on driver side - VX4- with R248 aerial for AM/FM and telephone aerial - R65-
❑ Designed as modular exterior mirror or extension mirror.
❑ Integrated in left exterior mirror.
❑ Removing and installing aerials ⇒ page 254 .

252 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

27.2.6 Overview of fitting locations - aerial system with radio navigation system
“RNS 510”

1 - Mobile telephone bracket


❑ SMBA coding D.
❑ Optional
2 - Telephone transmitter and
receiver unit - R36-
❑ SMBA coding D.
3 - Digital TV tuner - R171-
4 - Control unit with display for
radio and navigation - J503-
❑ RNS 510
5 - Connector for TV aerial ca‐
ble
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding F.
6 - Exterior mirror on driver
side - VX5- with radio aerial 2 -
R93- , digital-radio aerial -
R183- , GPS aerial - R50- and
aerial 2 for TV - R56-
❑ Designed as modular
exterior mirror or exten‐
sion mirror.
❑ Integrated in right exte‐
rior mirror.
❑ Removing and installing
aerials ⇒ page 254 .
7 - Aerial base line connection
8 - Connector for FM aerial ca‐
ble
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding I.
9 - Connector for GPS aerial cable
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding C.
10 - Connector for AM/FM aerial cable
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding B.
11 - Connector for TV aerial cable
❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding E.
12 - Aerial base line connection
13 - Exterior mirror on driver side - VX4- with R248 aerial for AM/FM, telephone aerial - R65- and aerial 1 for
TV - R55-
❑ Designed as modular exterior mirror or extension mirror.
❑ Integrated in left exterior mirror.
❑ Removing and installing aerials ⇒ page 254 .

27. Aerial systems, vehicles as of model year 2010 253


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

14 - Connector for telephone aerial cable


❑ Installed in door.
❑ SMBA coding D.
15 - Aerial line connection to mobile telephone bracket
❑ Optional

27.3 Fitting location overview - aerial in mod‐


ular exterior mirror
Fitting locations of aerials in left exterior mirror:

1 - Aerial film depending on


equipment for AM/FM or AM/
FM/TV
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 257
2 - Aerial film for GMS/UMTS
telephone
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 258

Fitting locations of aerials in right exterior mirror:

254 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Aerial film depending on


equipment for FM or FM/DAB
or FM/TV
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 257
2 - Navigation system aerial
(GPS)
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 260

27.4 Overview of fitting locations - internet


access aerial
Vehicles with “Business” equipment level as of model year 2012
have wireless internet access (“WLAN”) and a “GPS” system. For
data transfer, roof aerial - R216- is fitted at front. The roof aerial
- R216- is purely there to permit the internet access control unit -
J666- to be used and operated. If the vehicle also has a mobile
telephone system or a radio-navigation system, the relevant aer‐
ials are located in the exterior mirrors ⇒ page 246 .

27. Aerial systems, vehicles as of model year 2010 255


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Roof aerial - R216-


❑ With integrated GSM
aerial 2 - R267- and
GPS aerial 2 - R268-
❑ Installed at front of roof
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 265
2 - Cable connection from roof
aerial to internet access con‐
trol unit - J666- for navigation
system signals (GPS)
3 - Cable connection from roof
aerial to internet access con‐
trol unit - J666- for mobile
phone connection signals
(GSM)
❑ Colour code red
4 - Internet access control unit
- J666-
❑ Installed in glove com‐
partment
❑ Performance of LEDs
on internet access con‐
trol unit - J666-
⇒ page 270
❑ Troubleshooting
⇒ page 272
❑ Restore factory settings
⇒ page 271
❑ Not capable of self-diag‐
nosis
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 270
5 - Wireless connection be‐
tween the WiFi-enabled termi‐
nal devices and the internet access control unit - J666-
6 - WiFi-enabled terminal device, e.g. laptop
❑ Not included in scope of supply
7 - WiFi-enabled terminal device, e.g. mobile phone
❑ Not included in scope of supply
8 - WiFi-enabled terminal device, e.g. MP3 player, iPod etc.
❑ Not included in scope of supply
9 - Cable connectors for power supply
❑ Terminal 31, earth
❑ Terminal 30, positive
❑ Signal from S-contact, ignition/starter switch

256 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

27.5 Removing and installing aerial films for


AM/FM/TV/DAB in modular exterior mir‐
ror
Removing:
– Remove mirror glass from exterior mirror in which the aerial to
be repaired is installed ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep.
gr. 66 .
– Remove door trim on side of respective exterior mirror ⇒ Gen‐
eral body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Release and disconnect all aerial connectors -arrows- and
system connector -1- for wires leading to exterior mirror and
unscrew bolt -2-.

– Remove sealing cap -arrow- from door outer panel.


– Unscrew the 3 mirror housing securing bolts.
– Remove exterior mirror from door.
– Dismantle mirror housing ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
Rep. gr. 66 .
– On removing lower mirror housing trim, unclip aerial film from
mirror housing trim securing points.

– Unclip aerial film at points marked with -arrows-.


– Pull aerial film a little to one side so impedance converter at‐
tachment is accessible.

27. Aerial systems, vehicles as of model year 2010 257


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Unscrew securing bolt -arrow- from impedance converter.


– Remove aerial film and pull aerial wiring connected to impe‐
dance converter out of mirror housing.
Installing:
– Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note
the following:

– Install aerial film so that 2 aerial film fastening points are clip‐
ped on one bracket on mirror housing at -A-.

– Install the aerial film in such a way that one tongue -1- is clip‐
ped in before the other tongue -2-.
– On assembling mirror housing, clip both lower tabs on aerial
film to lower mirror housing trim.
– Make sure that aerial wiring is routed correctly in mirror hous‐
ing.
– When routing wires from exterior mirror into door, note that
wires have to be routed around window channel inside door.
Otherwise, wiring harness for exterior mirror is damaged or
separated by door window on lowering door window.

– Insert sealing cap for wire so that arrow -1- on sealing cap
points upwards.

27.6 Removing and installing aerial film for


GSM/UMTS telephone in modular exte‐
rior mirror
Removing:
– Remove mirror glass from left exterior mirror ⇒ General body
repairs, exterior; Rep. gr. 66 .

258 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Remove left door trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.


gr. 70 .
– Release and disconnect all aerial connectors -arrows- and
system connector -1- for wires leading to exterior mirror and
unscrew bolt -2-.

– Remove sealing cap -arrow- from door outer panel.


– Unscrew the 3 mirror housing securing bolts.
– Remove exterior mirror from door.
– Dismantle mirror housing ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
Rep. gr. 66 .
– On removing lower mirror housing trim, unclip aerial film from
mirror housing trim securing points.

– Unclip aerial film for GSM/UMTS telephone at points marked


with -arrows-.
– Remove aerial film and pull connected aerial wiring out of mir‐
ror housing.
Installing:
– Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note
the following:

– Clip in aerial film for GSM/UMTS telephone at points marked


with -arrows-.

27. Aerial systems, vehicles as of model year 2010 259


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Route the wire of the aerial film in such a way that it runs under
the bolt -arrow- in the mirror housing.
Do not secure the wire of the aerial film at any other point in the
mirror housing. Otherwise, the length of the aerial wire will be too
short when the connector is installed in the door.
– On assembling mirror housing, clip both lower tabs on aerial
film to lower mirror housing trim.
– Make sure that aerial wiring is routed correctly in mirror hous‐
ing.
– When routing wires from exterior mirror into door, note that
wires have to be routed around window channel inside door.
Otherwise, wiring harness for exterior mirror is damaged or
separated by door window on lowering door window.

– Insert sealing cap for wire so that arrow -1- on sealing cap
points upwards.

27.7 Removing and installing aerial for navi‐


gation in modular exterior mirror

Note

♦ This aerial is installed in right mirror housing.


♦ In the case of a new aerial for navigation, adhesive strip for
securing is included in delivery.

Removing:
– Remove aerial film for FM/TV/DAB from mirror housing until
the aerial for navigation located beneath the film is accessible
⇒ page 257 .
– Use a small screwdriver to lever aerial for navigation off mirror
housing -arrows-.
– Remove aerial and pull connected aerial wiring out of mirror
housing.
– Remove front right door trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior;
Rep. gr. 70 ; Front door trim; Removing and installing front
door trim, front passenger side .
– Release and disconnect electrical connector for aerial wire,
and remove aerial.
Installing:
– Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note
the following:

260 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Install aerial film so that 2 aerial film fastening points are clip‐
ped on one bracket on mirror housing at -A-.

– Install the aerial film in such a way that one tongue -1- is clip‐
ped in before the other tongue -2-.
– On assembling mirror housing, clip both lower tabs on aerial
film to lower mirror housing trim.
– Make sure that aerial wiring is routed correctly in mirror hous‐
ing.
– When routing wires from exterior mirror into door, note that
wires have to be routed around window channel inside door.
Otherwise, wiring harness for exterior mirror is damaged or
separated by door window on lowering door window.

– Insert sealing cap for wire so that arrow -1- on sealing cap
points upwards.

27. Aerial systems, vehicles as of model year 2010 261


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

27.8 Removing and installing aerial for AM/


FM/DAB in bow-mounted exterior mirror

Note

♦ If the aerials in the bow-mounted exterior mirror have to be


repaired, the complete mirror base, including bow, has to be
renewed. Because the aerial cables with connectors cannot
be pushed through the bow afterwards, the complete base of
the mirror, including bow and the internal aerial cables, is re‐
garded as the replacement part.
♦ Depending on equipment level, the bow-mounted exterior mir‐
rors may have different aerials installed than shown in the
illustration.
♦ Possible replacement-part variants for aerial repair of bow-
mounted exterior mirror:

1 - Plug-in aerial connectors


2 - Base of mirror with bow
3 - Telephone aerial (GSM)
4 - Aerials for radio reception (FM and DAB)
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove right exterior mirror ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
Rep. gr. 66 .
– Dismantling external mirror ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
Rep. gr. 66

– Push aerials -A- from new bow through mirror housing


-arrow-.

– Insert AM/FM/DAB aerial in groove -arrows- all round mirror


housing.

262 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Pull pieces of covering film -arrows- of adhesive pads and at‐


tach aerial to mirror housing.

– Secure aerial module -A- with screw -arrow-.


Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Re-assemble exterior mirror, making sure that aerial wires are
correctly routed in mirror housing ⇒ General body repairs,
exterior; Rep. gr. 66 .
– Install exterior mirror ⇒ General body repairs, exterior; Rep.
gr. 66 .

27.9 Removing and installing telephone aer‐


ial (GSM) in bow-mounted exterior mir‐
ror

Note

♦ If the aerials in the bow-mounted exterior mirror have to be


repaired, the complete mirror base, including bow, has to be
renewed. Because the aerial cables with connectors cannot
be pushed through the bow afterwards, the complete base of
the mirror, including bow and the internal aerial cables, is re‐
garded as the replacement part.
♦ Depending on equipment level, the bow-mounted exterior mir‐
rors may have different aerials installed than shown in the
illustration.
♦ Possible replacement-part variants for aerial repair of bow-
mounted exterior mirror:

1 - Plug-in aerial connectors


2 - Base of mirror with bow
3 - Telephone aerial (GSM)
4 - Aerials for radio reception (FM and DAB)
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Removing left exterior mirror ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
Rep. gr. 66 .
– Dismantling external mirror ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
Rep. gr. 66

27. Aerial systems, vehicles as of model year 2010 263


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Push aerials -A- from new bow through mirror housing


-arrow-.

– Insert telephone aerial (GSM) in groove -arrows- in mirror


housing.

– Pull pieces of covering film -arrows- of adhesive pads and at‐


tach aerial to mirror housing.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
– Re-assemble exterior mirror, making sure that aerial wires are
correctly routed in mirror housing ⇒ General body repairs,
exterior; Rep. gr. 66 .
– Mount left exterior mirror ⇒ General body repairs, exterior;
Rep. gr. 66 .

27.10 Removing and installing roof aerial for


telephone system in rear passenger
compartment

Note

The roof aerial is installed on rear of vehicle roof.

Removing:
– Detach moulded headliner at rear of passenger compartment
⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep. gr. 68 ; Roof trims;
Removing and installing moulded headliner .
– Carefully lower moulded headliner until securing nut of aerial
is accessible.

264 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Unscrew nut -arrow-.

– Release and disconnect aerial wire connector -arrow-.


– Guide out aerial wire through body aperture and remove roof
aerial from roof.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Note

Ensure that the aerial wires -arrows- are not squeezed in the aer‐
ial base when installing the roof aerial.

27.11 Removing and installing front roof aerial


- R216-

Note

The front roof aerial - R216- is purely there to permit the internet
access control unit - J666- to be used and operated. If the vehicle
also has a mobile telephone system or a radio-navigation system,
the relevant aerials are located in the exterior mirrors. For further
information, see chapter "Aerial systems, vehicles as of model
year 2010" ⇒ page 246 .

Special tools and workshop equipment required

27. Aerial systems, vehicles as of model year 2010 265


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1783-

Removing
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove front interior light ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 96 ;
Lights and controls in roof trim; Removing and installing inte‐
rior light .
– Remove right sun visor ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 68 ; Roof trims; Removing and installing moulded head‐
liner .
Only vehicles with sliding sunroof
– Remove left and right A-pillar trims ⇒ General body repairs,
interior; Rep. gr. 70 ; Pillar and side trims; Removing and in‐
stalling A-pillar trim .
– Remove left sun visor ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 68 ; Roof trims; Removing and installing moulded head‐
liner .
Continued for all vehicles
– Carefully lower moulded headliner at front until securing nut of
roof aerial - R216- becomes accessible.
– Unscrew nut -arrow-.
– Carefully lower moulded headliner in area of right sun visor.

266 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Release and disconnect both connectors -arrows-, and re‐


move roof aerial - R216- .

Note

One to three connectors may be present here depending on the


aerial version.

The connector with the violet housing is the wiring connection for
the telephone.
The connector with the blue housing is the wiring connection for
the navigation system.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal, observing the following:

Note

Ensure that the aerial wires -arrows- are not squeezed in the aer‐
ial base when installing the roof aerial - R216- .

27.12 Renewal of aerial wiring


Renewal of aerial wiring: ⇒ Electrical System, General informa‐
tion; Rep. gr. 97 ; Wiring harness repair set; Repairs to wiring
harnesses; Renewal of aerial wiring .

27. Aerial systems, vehicles as of model year 2010 267


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

28 “WiFi” internet access and “GPS”


system, vehicles with “Business”
equipment level, as of model year
2012
⇒ “28.1 General description - WiFi internet access and GPS sys‐
tem”, page 268
⇒ “28.2 System overview - WiFi internet access and GPS sys‐
tem”, page 269
⇒ “28.3 Removing and installing internet access control unit J666
”, page 270
⇒ “28.4 Internet access control unit J666 - LED indicator condi‐
tions”, page 270
⇒ “28.5 Internet access control unit J666 - troubleshooting”, page
272

28.1 General description - “WiFi” internet ac‐


cess and “GPS” system
Vehicles with “Business” equipment level as of model year 2012:
The wireless internet access system consists of an internet ac‐
cess control unit - J666- with an integral router. A SIM card from
a telecommunications provider is required for internet access.
WiFi-enabled devices can be connected wirelessly to the internet
access control unit - J666- . The WiFi capability means that all the
passengers in the vehicle are able to connect to the internet.

Note

Not all WiFi-enabled terminal devices, e.g. games consoles, lap‐


tops or mobile phones, have been tested for compatibility with the
vehicle's electrical systems. It is, therefore, possible that such
devices could cause interference.

The internet access control unit - J666- is powered and booted


when the ignition key is inserted and turned to the first stage of
the electronic ignition lock.
The system has a GPS system. In this system, when the ignition
key is removed or turned to the first switch position of the ignition
lock, the internet access control unit - J666- generates an infor‐
mation with the current location coordinates and sends it as an
email or text message if a GPS signal is available. Whether email
or a text message is sent can be selected in the menu settings.
These data can then be retrieved using suitable devices or web‐
sites. Additional information: → Operating Manual.
After the ignition key is removed, Internet access control unit -
J666- breaks the connection.
The roof aerial - R216- is used then ⇒ page 265 .

Note

The roof aerial is purely there to permit the internet access control
unit - J666- to be used and operated. If the vehicle also has a
mobile telephone system or a radio-navigation system, the rele‐
vant aerials are located in the exterior mirrors. For further infor‐
mation, see chapter "Aerial systems, vehicles as of model year
2010" ⇒ page 246 .

268 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

For details on starting up and operating the internet access con‐


trol unit - J666- , refer to the Operating Manual.
Fault detection and fault display:
The system is not capable of self-diagnosis. In the event of repair
work please use ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding
and Fitting locations. Additional diagnostic options are available
in the chapters Performance of LEDs on internet access control
unit - J666- ⇒ page 270 and Troubleshooting ⇒ page 272 .

28.2 System overview - “WiFi” internet ac‐


cess and “GPS” system
Vehicles with “Business” equipment level as of model year 2012:

1 - GSM aerial 2 - R267- and


GPS aerial 2 - R268-
❑ Additional information:
chapter "Aerial sys‐
tems" ⇒ page 238 .
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 265
2 - Cable connection from roof
aerial to internet access con‐
trol unit - J666- for navigation
system signals (GPS)
3 - Cable connection from roof
aerial to internet access con‐
trol unit - J666- for mobile
phone connection signals
(GSM)
❑ Colour code red
4 - Internet access control unit
- J666-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 270
❑ Performance of LEDs
on internet access con‐
trol unit - J666-
⇒ page 270
❑ Troubleshooting
⇒ page 272
❑ Restore factory settings
⇒ page 271
❑ Not capable of self-diag‐
nosis
5 - Wireless connection be‐
tween the WiFi-enabled termi‐
nal devices and the internet
access control unit - J666-
6 - WiFi-enabled terminal device, e.g. laptop
7 - WiFi-enabled terminal device, e.g. mobile phone
8 - WiFi-enabled terminal device, e.g. MP3 player, iPod etc.
9 - Cable connectors for power supply
❑ Terminal 31, earth
❑ Terminal 30, positive
❑ Signal from S-contact, ignition/starter switch

28. “WiFi” internet access and “GPS” system, vehicles with “Business” equipment level, as of model year 2012 269
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

28.3 Removing and installing internet access


control unit - J666-

Note

♦ The internet access control unit - J666- -1- is installed in the


glove compartment.
♦ The internet access control unit - J666- has stud bolts on the
inside, and the internet access control unit - J666- is secured
by means of nuts located on top of the glove compartment.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.

Note

The internet access control unit - J666- can only be removed after
removing the glove compartment.

– Remove glove compartment ⇒ General body repairs, interior;


Rep. gr. 68 ; Compartments, covers and trims; Removing and
installing glove compartment .

– Unscrew nuts -1-.

– Remove internet access control unit - J666- . Release and


disconnect connectors at rear of unit.
♦ 1 = blue connector for navigation signals (GPS)
♦ 2 = red connector for mobile phone signals (GSM)
♦ 3 = cable connectors for power supply
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

28.4 Internet access control unit - J666- -


LED indicator conditions
The internet access control unit - J666- has 3 LEDs on the front
of the unit which indicate the unit status.

270 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

LED for »POWER« -1- on internet access control unit - J666- :


♦ Not lit up = unit off, power supply switched off
♦ Green, slow flashing = start-up phase, unit not yet ready for
operation
♦ Green, steady = unit switch on, standby
♦ Red, steady = error/fault

LED for »WiFi« -2- on internet access control unit - J666- :


♦ Does not light up = WLAN switched off
♦ Blue, slow flashing = WiFi started, no terminal device connec‐
ted
♦ Blue, steady = WiFi on, terminal device connected
♦ Blue, flickering = WiFi on, data communication with terminal
device
♦ Red, steady = error/fault

LED for »mobile phone UMTS/3G activity« -3- on internet access


control unit - J666- :
♦ Not lit up = no SIM card inserted, SIM card not properly en‐
gaged, no internet access
♦ Yellow, steady = mobile phone connection established, no da‐
ta communication
♦ Yellow, flickering = data transfer to internet
♦ Yellow, slow flashing = connection established to provider
♦ Yellow/red, alternate flashing = connection to provider not
possible
♦ Red, slow flashing = SIM inserted, PIN required, PIN incorrect
♦ Red, fast flashing = inserted SIM card has not been recog‐
nised
♦ Red, steady = error/fault
Restoring factory settings:

– Press button -2- for longer than 10 seconds.


WiFi LED and 3G LED -2- and -3- flash red simultaneously.
The original access data can then be restored.
Software update:

28. “WiFi” internet access and “GPS” system, vehicles with “Business” equipment level, as of model year 2012 271
Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

When a software update is being carried out, the WiFi LED and
3G LED -2- and -3- flash red alternately. The internet access con‐
trol unit - J666- is then restarted.

Note

During this time do not remove the SIM card and do not discon‐
nect the internet access control unit - J666- from the supply
voltage.

28.5 Internet access control unit - J666- -


troubleshooting
Internet access control unit - J666- cannot be switched on:
Check that the supply voltage is not too low and that the energy
management system has not switched the power supply off.
– Start engine.
– If the internet access control unit - J666- cannot be switched
on, restart the system by pressing the “Reset button” -1-.
No WiFi access to the internet access control unit - J666- :
Possible causes:
♦ SIM card not properly inserted, unit on standby
♦ WiFi network code incorrectly input
If a connection to the unit can no longer be established even
though the SIM card is properly inserted and the correct network
code has been input:
♦ Restore factory settings ⇒ page 271
Then use the original access data.
No internet access:
Possible causes:
♦ No signal at the current position
♦ Internet connection disabled in the configuration options
♦ Incorrect provider settings selected
♦ Roaming not enabled, and vehicle is abroad
♦ No credit on SIM card
♦ No data-enabled SIM card inserted

272 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

29 Reversing camera system


⇒ “29.1 General description - reversing camera system”,
page 273
⇒ “29.2 Overview of fitting locations - reversing camera system”,
page 274
⇒ “29.3 Removing and installing reversing camera”, page 274
⇒ “29.4 Removing reversing camera from camera housing and
installing it into camera housing”, page 276
⇒ “29.5 Removing and installing reversing camera system control
unit”, page 277
⇒ “29.6 Coding reversing camera system control unit”,
page 278
⇒ “29.7 Calibrating reversing camera system”, page 278

29.1 General description - reversing camera


system

Note

♦ When handling complaints, it is essential to understand the


function and operation of the reversing camera system.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Owner's manual
♦ In the event of repair work or for fault finding, use the ⇒ vehicle
diagnostic tester in “Guided Fault Finding” mode ⇒ Current
flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
♦ When the battery is reconnected, check the items of equip‐
ment in the vehicle (radio, clock, convenience electronics etc.)
with reference to the workshop manual and/or operating in‐
structions.

The reversing camera system supports the driver during revers‐


ing. The driver is provided with an image of the traffic situation
behind the vehicle via the radio or the radio/navigation system
monitor. The system is available as an option.
The system is activated when reverse gear is engaged, even if
the radio or radio/navigation system is switched off.
The reversing camera system consists of the following compo‐
nents:
♦ Reversing camera - R189-
♦ Reversing camera system control unit - J772-
♦ Control unit with display for radio and navigation - J503-
♦ and steering wheel with steering angle sender - G85- .
The reversing camera system may have to be recalibrated fol‐
lowing repair work on the vehicle. More specifically, this is nec‐
essary after:
♦ Removing and installing reversing camera
♦ Renewing reversing camera system control unit
♦ Accident repairs on rear lid
♦ After vehicle alignment
♦ Repairs to front or rear axle

29. Reversing camera system 273


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

Calibrating reversing camera system ⇒ page 278


Fault detection and fault display:
The reversing camera system is equipped with self-diagnosis.
For fault finding, use vehicle diagnosis, testing and information
system in “Guided fault finding” function.

29.2 Overview of fitting locations - reversing camera system

1 - Reversing camera system


control unit - J772-
❑ Fitting location: under
right front seat.
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 277
❑ Coding reversing cam‐
era system control unit
⇒ page 278
2 - Number plate light carrier
3 - Reversing camera - R189-
❑ Fitting location: in num‐
ber plate light carrier in
rear lid.
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ page 274
❑ Removing and installing
reversing camera hous‐
ing ⇒ page 276 .
❑ Calibrating reversing
camera system
⇒ page 278
4 - Steering angle sender -
G85-
❑ Fitting location: in steer‐
ing column trim behind
steering wheel
5 - Control unit with display unit
for radio and navigation - J503-
❑ Fitting location: at front
of centre console
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ Communication;
Rep. gr. 91

29.3 Removing and installing reversing cam‐


era
Special tools and workshop equipment required

274 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

♦ Torque wrench - V.A.G 1783-

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove rear lid trim ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 70 ; Rear door trims .
– Release and disconnect connectors -arrows- of wiring harness
leading to reversing camera.

– Release and disconnect connector -arrow- from number plate


light carrier.

– Unscrew 4 securing nuts -arrows- from number plate light car‐


rier.

29. Reversing camera system 275


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Remove number plate light carrier -1- and guide wires


-arrow- out of rear lid.

– Pull reversing camera in -direction of arrow- off number plate


light carrier.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

Caution

Danger of leakage!
Twisted or not properly positioned seals may result in danger
of water ingress into the luggage compartment.
Check that installed seals are in good condition and in proper
installation position.

– Connect and engage all connectors of the reversing camera


wiring harness.
– Secure wires and connectors with wiring retainers to prevent
rattling.
– After installation, clean reversing camera lens with a lint-free
cloth.
– Recalibrate reversing camera system ⇒ page 278 .

29.4 Removing reversing camera from cam‐


era housing and installing it into camera
housing
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove reversing camera ⇒ page 274 .

276 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Release fasteners -arrows- on both sides, and pull reversing


camera -3- together with mounting frame -1- out of camera
housing -2-.
Installing:
Installation is carried out in the reverse sequence of removal.

29.5 Removing and installing reversing cam‐


era system control unit

Note

The reversing camera system control unit is installed under the


right front seat.

Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Move front passenger seat to the foremost position.
– Remove lower rear trim from seat supporting frame.
– Release and disconnect connector -arrow-.

– Press 4 retaining clips -arrows-, and pull out control unit.

29. Reversing camera system 277


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Pull out locking mechanism of data wire in


-direction of arrow- and disconnect connector.
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:
Only if control unit has been renewed:
– Recalibrate reversing camera system ⇒ page 278 .

29.6 Coding reversing camera system con‐


trol unit
– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐
eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .
– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then
the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Reversing camera system
♦ Reversing camera functions
♦ Coding control unit

29.7 Calibrating reversing camera system


⇒ “29.7.1 Preparatory measures for calibration”, page 278
⇒ “29.7.2 Calibrating reversing camera system”, page 283

29.7.1 Preparatory measures for calibration


Reversing camera system may have to be recalibrated following
repair work on the vehicle. More specifically, this is necessary
after:
♦ Removing and installing reversing camera
♦ Renewing reversing camera system control unit
♦ Accident repairs on rear lid
♦ After vehicle alignment
♦ Repairs to front or rear axle
Extensive preliminary work is required before actual calibration
can be carried out using vehicle diagnostic tester . This is descri‐
bed in the following.
Special tools and workshop equipment required

278 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

♦ Calibration unit - VAS 6350-

For calibration, vehicle must be positioned on a horizontally, firm


and level surface. Nobody may be inside vehicle during meas‐
urement. Vehicle must not be moved during measurement. Open‐
ing and closing the vehicle doors must be avoided. On camera
image in vehicle interior, check whether all calibration device
markings are easy to identify and not disturbed by light influences
or reflections.
Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, General
information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and informa‐
tion systems .
– Set steering wheel sender - G85- to wheels-straight-ahead
position.
– Switch on ignition and engage reverse gear. This activates the
reversing camera system.

Note

Ensure that reversing camera has free visibility on calibration


platform ⇒ Item 10 (page 280) .

Overview of assembled measuring facility:

29. Reversing camera system 279


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

1 - Wheel centre mounting -


VAS 6350/1-
2 - Wheel centre mounting -
VAS 6350/1-
3 - Right angle for mounting
measuring unit for distance
measurement
4 - Linear laser - VAS 6350/3-
❑ Switching on and off ⇒
Owner's manual
5 - Plastic foot
❑ Total of three on bottom
of measuring equip‐
ment.
❑ Adjustable to adjust hor‐
izontal position of meas‐
uring facility
6 - Spacing laser - VAS
6350/2-
❑ Notes on operation ⇒
Owner's manual
7 - Hole for determining the
height of the floor plate.
8 - Spirit level on measuring fa‐
cility
❑ To check horizontal po‐
sition of measuring fa‐
cility
9 - Left angle for mounting
measuring unit for distance
measurement
10 - Calibration unit - VAS
6350/4-
❑ Distance between angle brackets of calibration device ( ⇒ Item 3 (page 280) or ⇒ Item 9 (page 280) )
and paddles on wheel centre mountings of rear wheels: 1.20 m - 1.70 m -dimension A-

– Secure 3 wheel bolt adapters in each hole circle “112” of wheel


centre mounting.
– Fit the paddles on the two wheel centre mountings and secure
them with the clamping nuts.

280 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Fit the wheel centre mountings onto the wheel bolts on the rear
wheels. Wheel centre mountings are positioned and secured
in the adapters through »O-rings«.

Note

Fit wheel centre mountings on wheels in such a way that no »anti-


theft wheel bolts«, if any, are connected to wheel bolt adapters.

– Set paddles with the help of the clamping nuts in such a way
that they can move freely just above the floor.

Note

The paddles must be free to move and must be able to swing to


vertical position.

– Position the calibration unit - VAS 6350/4- at a distance of


1.20 m to 1.70 m behind vehicle. Set distance between angle
brackets of calibration unit and paddles on wheel centre
mountings of rear wheels to -dimension A-, as shown in the
illustration ⇒ Item 10 (page 280) .

– Align calibration unit - VAS 6350/4- into the horizontal position.


Do this by turning the plastic feet under the calibration unit until
the air bubble in the spirit level is precisely in the centre of the
indicator -arrow-.

– Press pushbutton -1- to switch the laser -VAS 6350/2- to the


measuring method that does not measure the length of the
laser's housing at the same time. This is the case when the
arrow -2- is shown in the indicated position on the display.

29. Reversing camera system 281


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Fit laser -VAS 6350/2- vertically onto the measurement hole


-arrow- to determine the height of the floor plate. Make a note
of the displayed value. Later in the procedure the tester will
prompt you to enter this value.

– Measure the reversing camera height -A- from the middle of


the camera lens to the ground. Note displayed value. Later in
the procedure the tester will prompt you to enter this value.

– Install laser -1- centrally on back edge of calibration unit - VAS


6350/4- .
– Switch on the laser on calibration unit -1-. Align the whole cal‐
ibration unit so that the laser beam -2- is focused on the rear
of the vehicle in the centre above the VW badge.

– Switch on spacing laser - VAS 6350/2- for distance measure‐


ment by pressing the ON button. The following display appears
and the laser is activated:

282 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Hold the spacing laser for distance measurement -2- on one


side of the calibration unit flush in the bracket. The spacing
laser must be firmly in contact with the bracket.

– Ensure that laser beam from spacing laser for distance meas‐
urement hits lower, enlarged part of paddle -1-.
If this is not the case, adjust paddles accordingly on wheel mount‐
ing using clamping bolts.

– With one hand, hold the spacing laser for distance measure‐
ment firmly in the bracket on the measuring facility. Now,
briefly press ON button to measure distance. The following
appears in the display:
The distance is shown on the display in “metres”.
– Make a note of the distance.
– Repeat measuring process in same manner for other rear
wheel on other side of calibration unit.
Measured distance value must be identical on both sides. If value
is not identical, adjust calibration unit until values on both sides
are identical and the distance lies between 1.20 m and 1.70 m.
When adjusting the calibration unit, ensure that the laser beam of
the spacing laser continues to hit the vehicle centrally above the
VW logo and that the spirit level indicator remains in the centre.
If necessary, readjust accordingly.
The value for the measured distance must be entered during cal‐
ibration in vehicle diagnostic tester in “millimetres”.
Calibrating reversing camera system ⇒ page 283

29.7.2 Calibrating reversing camera system

Note

First carry out the steps for preliminary work for calibration
⇒ page 278 .

– Connect vehicle diagnostic tester ⇒ Electrical system, Gen‐


eral information; Rep. gr. 97 ; Vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information systems; Connecting vehicle diagnostic tester .
– Select operating mode “Guided Fault Finding” in vehicle diag‐
nosis tester .

29. Reversing camera system 283


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Using “GoTo” button, select “Functions/component” and then


the following menu options in succession:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 - Self-diagnosis compatible systems
♦ Reversing camera system
♦ Reversing camera functions
♦ Carry out reversing camera calibration
From this point on additional information on the calibration pro‐
cedure will be provided via the vehicle diagnostic tester .

284 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

30 Multifunction steering wheel


⇒ “30.1 General description - multifunction steering wheel”, page
285
⇒ “30.2 System overview - multifunction steering wheel”,
page 286
⇒ “30.3 Removing and installing multifunction buttons E440 /
E441 ”, page 288
⇒ “30.4 Connector pin assignment - multifunction steering wheel
control unit”, page 290

30.1 General description - multifunction


steering wheel
Vehicles up to model year 2009
The multifunction steering wheel allows the main functions of the
radio unit or radio navigation system to be selected from the
steering wheel.
The multifunction steering wheel comprises the following compo‐
nents:
♦ The operating unit in steering wheel with two sets of buttons
on left and right with integrated electronics.
♦ The control unit for the multifunction steering wheel
♦ Diesel vehicles have a balance weight fitted in the multifunc‐
tion steering wheel to reduce the transfer of vibrations.

Note

♦ When faced with complaints, it is absolutely necessary to be


familiar with the functions and operation of the multifunction
steering wheel.
♦ Additional information ⇒ Owner's manual

Vehicles as of model year 2010


The multifunction steering wheel enables the most important
functions of the radio unit or radio/navigation system, the tele‐
phone and the cruise control system to be operated from the
steering wheel.
The multifunction steering wheel comprises the following compo‐
nents:
♦ operating unit in steering wheel with sets of buttons on left and
right (depending on equipment variant) with integrated elec‐
tronics;
♦ multifunction steering wheel control unit - J453- integrated in
left set of buttons.
The multifunction steering wheel control unit - J453- reads the
button information and transmits them to steering column elec‐
tronics control unit - J527- via a LIN bus. From control unit for
steering column electronics - J527- the data are transferred to the
individual devices via CAN bus (comfort) and data bus diagnostic
interface - J533- .
Fault finding and adaption with ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

30. Multifunction steering wheel 285


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

30.2 System overview - multifunction steer‐


ing wheel
⇒ “30.2.1 System overview - multifunction steering wheel, vehi‐
cles up to model year 2009”, page 286
⇒ “30.2.2 System overview - multifunction steering wheel, vehi‐
cles as of model year 2010”, page 287

30.2.1 System overview - multifunction steering wheel, vehicles up to model year


2009

1 - Multifunction steering wheel


❑ With integrated operat‐
ing unit - E221- .
❑ With steering wheel ap‐
plication electronics in
the operating unit.
❑ Removing and installing
operating unit in steer‐
ing wheel ⇒ page 288
2 - Dash panel insert
❑ Control unit with display
in dash panel insert -
J285-
❑ Removing and installing
dash panel insert ⇒
Electrical system; Rep.
gr. 90 ; Dash panel in‐
sert .
3 - Radio - R- or control unit
with display for radio and nav‐
igation - J503- (radio naviga‐
tion system)
❑ Fitting location: in centre
console
4 - Multifunction steering wheel
control unit - J453-
❑ Pin assignment
⇒ page 290
5 - Engine control unit
❑ Commands sent to the
multifunction steering
wheel for CCS are pro‐
cessed accordingly by
the engine control unit.

286 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

30.2.2 System overview - multifunction steering wheel, vehicles as of model year


2010

1 - Control unit in dash panel


insert - J285-
2 - Steering column switch, left
❑ For cruise control sys‐
tem (CCS).
3 - Functional unit for cruise
control system (CCS) in steer‐
ing column switch
4 - Steering column switch
5 - Steering angle sender -
G85- functional unit in steering
column switch
6 - Functional unit for multi‐
function steering wheel (MFW)
in steering column switch
7 - Steering column switch,
right
❑ With buttons for multi‐
function display in dash
panel insert.
8 - Multifunction steering wheel
(MFW) +/- line connections
9 - Multifunction steering wheel
10 - Line connection for data
exchange to and from multi‐
function steering wheel
11 - Multifunction buttons on
right in steering wheel - E441-
❑ Multifunction buttons on
right in steering wheel
are not installed togeth‐
er with “Lowline” dash
panel insert. In this var‐
iant, menu control function is carried out via buttons on steering column switch.
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 288
12 - Multifunction buttons on left in steering wheel - E440-
❑ With integrated multifunction steering wheel regulation control unit - J453-
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ page 288
13 - Radio - R- or control unit with display for radio and navigation - J503-
14 - Convenience CAN bus
15 - Telephone transmitter and receiver unit - R36-
16 - Onboard supply control unit - J519-
17 - Engine control unit - J623-
18 - Line connection for signal information to engine control unit on status of cruise control system (CCS),
switched on or off
19 - Drive CAN bus

30. Multifunction steering wheel 287


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

30.3 Removing and installing multifunction


buttons - E440 / E441-
⇒ “30.3.1 Removing and installing multifunction buttons E440 /
E441 , vehicles up to model year 2009”, page 288
⇒ “30.3.2 Removing and installing multifunction buttons E440 /
E441 , vehicles as of model year 2010”, page 288

30.3.1 Removing and installing multifunction


buttons - E440 / E441- , vehicles up to
model year 2009
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove driver airbag ⇒ General body repairs, interior; Rep.
gr. 69 ; Airbag; Removing and installing driver airbag .
– Unscrew bolts -arrows-.

– Disconnect electrical connectors -arrows-.


– Remove multifunction buttons - E440 / E441- .
Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal observing the following:
– Perform coding of steering column electronics control unit -
J527- and adaption of multifunction steering wheel ⇒ Vehicle
diagnostic tester.
Specified torques
Component Specified torque
Bolts on multifunction buttons - 1.2 Nm
E440 / E441-

30.3.2 Removing and installing multifunction


buttons - E440 / E441- , vehicles as of
model year 2010
Removing:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical equipment and then re‐
move ignition key.
– Remove airbag unit on driver side ⇒ General body repairs,
interior; Rep. gr. 69 ; Airbag; Removing and installing driver
side airbag unit .

288 Rep. gr.91 - Communication


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

– Unscrew bolt -arrow-.


– Remove multifunction button - E440 / E441- .

– Separate electrical connector -arrow-.


Installing:
Install in the reverse order of removal. When doing this, note the
following:

– Connect black electrical connector -arrow- to multifunction


button on left in steering wheel - E440- .

– Route lines as indicated in illustration -arrows-.


– Code steering column electronics control unit and adapt mul‐
tifunction steering wheel ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
Specified torques
Component Specified torque
Bolts on multifunction buttons - 1.2 Nm
E440 / E441-

30. Multifunction steering wheel 289


Business 2011 ➤ , California 2010 ➤ , Caravelle 2010 ➤ , Multivan 2010 ...
Communication - Edition 02.2019

30.4 Connector pin assignment - multifunc‐


tion steering wheel control unit
1- Convenience low-speed CAN bus
2- Not assigned
3- Convenience high-speed CAN bus
4- Not assigned
5- Radio, serial data
6- K wire, diagnosis
7- CCS positive, resume, accelerate
8- CAN negative
9- Not assigned
10 - Negative, terminal 31
11 - Relay for dual tone horn
12 - Positive, terminal 15
13 - Positive, terminal 30
14 - Not assigned
15 - Lights, terminal 58 d
16 - CCS negative, SET, decrease
17 - Heater input “ON”
18 - CAN bus to operating unit in steering wheel

290 Rep. gr.91 - Communication

You might also like